Home

Polycom KIRK Wireless Server 6000 User's Manual

1. Enter new Domain Name Type the new domain name and press Enter 7 The IAD displays the current lease time and prompt Current Lease time is 3600 seconds Enter DHCP Lease Time in seconds gt Type the new lease time value in seconds and press Enter 8 The IAD displays the NetBIOS Type Configuration menu Current NetBIOS Node Type h nod 1 B node 2 P node 4 M node 8 H node Type the option for the NetBIOS node type and press Enter 9 Press Escape to return to the DHCP Server Configuration menu and continue configuring DHCP Server 10 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 175 Configuring You must configure the DHCP address range pool to set the range of IP the DHCP addresses to return to the DHCP clients Both IP addresses must be on the same subnet Address To configure the DHCP address range pool Range Pool 1 Type P to select Configure DHCP Address Range Pool 2 The IAD displays the current high IP address and prompt Current High IP address of range pool 0 0 0 0 Enter new High IP address Type the new high IP address and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the current low IP address and prompt Current Low IP address of range pool 0 0 0 0 Enter new Low IP address Type the new low IP address and press Enter 4 The IAD displays the DHCP Server Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15
2. 0 0 10 RALOS RLOS RLOF SIGFRZ Enter any key to continue paging through the report press Escape to cancel and return to the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configuring ATM PVCs T 81 You may configure up to 8 ATM PVCs on the IAD To configure create and manage PVCs type 3 on the WAN configuration menu The IAD displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Figure 4 36 ATM PVC Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK ATM PVC Config Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK 1 Add New PVC 2 Modify Existing PVC 3 Delete PVC 4 Show Current PVCs Type the option to perform a task Proceed to the corresponding section Adding a New PVC page 81 Modifying an Existing PVC page 83 Deleting an existing PVC page 89 Displaying the Current PVCs page 89 NOTE Before you configure PVCs you must first set the datalink protocol to ATM If option 3 on the WAN Configuration menu displays Configure DLCls instead of Configure PVCs it is because your datalink protocol is set to Frame Relay instead of ATM Adding a PVC To add a PVC follow these steps 1 On the ATM PVC Configuration menu type 1 to select Add New PVC 2 The IAD displays a prompt for the VPI Enter Virtual Port Identifier VPI Type a VPI value between 0 and 255 default 0 and press Enter 3 The IAD displays a prompt for the VCI Enter Virtual Cir
3. You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure NAT Options that display in the NAT Configuration menu depend on your security level The menu is shown at the Supervisor security level NOTE If you sign on as Network Manager option B Enable Disable NAT Debug Messages is not displayed This option is reserved for Verilink network engineers Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to NAT configuration Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect Table 11 1 lists the default NAT settings Table 11 1 NAT Default Parameter Settings Parameter Range Default NAT Translation by Port Enabled Disabled Disabled NAT local server entry 1 to 10 1 NAT TCP Timeout 60 to 3600 seconds 300 seconds NAT UDP Timeout 60 to 3600 seconds 120 seconds NAT port range low end 5000 to 65534 5000 NAT port range high end 50000 to 65535 65535 NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration Enabling NAT Translation 191 A significant advantage of NAT is that you can configure it without changing hosts or routers other than those few routers on which NAT is configured NAT multiplexes internal network traffic and presents it to the Internet as if it is from a single source with one IP address To configure NAT complete the following steps Enable NAT translation by port following Configure the NAT local server page 192 Configure NAT TCP or UDP timeouts
4. ceesssecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 Setting Up TDM VNC Sag dares neces vest eiiceav ates se aeuera aaa eteed 58 iv NetEngine IAD User Guide Selecting the Physical Interface ccssccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 60 Configuring the GSHDSL Interface cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 61 Configuring the SDSL Interface 6500 ee eeeeeesteeeees 63 Configuring the SDSL Interface eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 65 Configuring the ADSL Interface ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 69 Setting the Interface to T1 or E11 cece ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 70 Configuring the T1 Interface saccccsaccnce cosesaeiaeccentieeneteinctseetnant 72 Configuring the E1 Interface eeeesneeeeeeeenennnnnnneeennnnnnneerenne 76 Configuring ATM PVCS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 81 Adding a PVG seess eeteetattacinrede acetates eemeceleneul nce deamteevensened 81 Modifying a PVO ceed scape vers sees pend eeediec week Aaneneeeesicce 83 Deleting a PV Ces ccctccaisteecmceesaduiecntinsanhaaniteccncetndndanideubieendies 89 Showing Current PVCS xis cscictnccesa cite ctaeduttslen coimamedemend 89 Configuring ATM Options sccsicccsnni utd cecieneieesieueh nicebiietineineriane 90 Configuring Frame Relay DLCIS 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 Modifying a IEG eneeteeeeene tenement ete enter eerie i ne pre enetnn amar te 93 Adding UG ss csceiecn teen esieauee nednia ted sion seedenssleccetes oteeven
5. Figure 4 59 End to End Fragmentation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK End to End Fragmentation Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK 1 Enable Disable End to End FRF 12 2 Set Fragment Size Type 1 to select End to End FRF 12 or type 2 to manually set the fragment size 15 If you type 1 the IAD displays the status and a prompt FRF 12 End to End Fragmentation is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable End to End fragmentation or type D to disable it NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 96 16 If you type 2 the IAD displays the fragment size prompt Enter maximum fragment size in bytes 100 1600 0 Type the fragment size in bytes and press Enter 17 The IAD displays the End to End Fragmentation Configuration menu Press Escape to return to the FR DLCI Config menu 18 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish DLCI configuration Deleting a DLCI To delete a DLCI 1 On the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu type 3 to select Delete DLCI 2 The IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLC Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation Select Port 1 8 Type the port number corresponding to the DLCI you want to delete a To permanently remove the DLCI configuration type y b To cancel the operation type n 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish DLCI
6. Administration Setting Derived Timing Options T 48 Use the Derived Timing options to enable and disable Derived Timing and to debug Derived Timing To configure set derived timing settings type T Telephony Clock Recovery on the Main menu The Telephony Clock Recovery menu supports both Derived Timing software clock aging and Network Timer Reference hardware clock alignment available on some IADs The IAD displays the Derived Timing menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK a a a a a a a a a a a a KKK Derived Timing KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK 1 Enable Disable Derived Timing 2 Enable Disable Derived Timing Debug Messages Type the option for the task you want to perform and proceed to the section following Enabling and Disabling Derived Timing When Derived Timing is enabled the IAD adjusts its clock source based on the arrival rate of voice packets To enable or disable derived timing follow these steps 1 Type 1 to select Enable Disable Derived Timing The IAD displays the current setting and prompts you to change it Derived Timing Feature is currently DISABLED Enable now Y 2 Type Y to change the current setting The IAD saves the configuration and then displays the Derived Timing menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Main menu 4 Reset the IAD page 15 Enabling and Disabling Derived Timing Debug Messages When you enable Derived Timing
7. The 7000 family is comprised of the NetEngine 7200 and NetEngine 7300 The IADs share common voice data configuration security and environmental features and specifications The 7200 has a T1 WAN interface and the 7300 has an SDSL WAN interface Table C 11 7000 Family Voice Features Feature Analog Voice Ports Signalling Dialing Ring Source Impedance REN Loop Current Idle State Voltage Ring Voltage Gain System Loss Digital Compression Encoding Echo Cancellation Fax Support Modem Support Calling Features Description 16 POTS ports FXS RJ21X loop start ground start DTMF tone Internal 600 Ohms 2 5 per port 25 mA typical gt 21V gt 40 vrms at 2 5 REN load Programmable 3dB to 9dB G 711 64 kbps PCM G 726 32 kbps ADPCM A law u law G 168 compliant single reflector V 17 V 29 support V 34 V 90 support caller ID flash hook three way calling distinctive ringing stutter dialtone call forwarding call waiting NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 287 Table C 12 7000 Family Data Features Feature LAN Interface Bridging Routing DHCP PPP HDLC Support Management Configuration Universal Serial Interface Description 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ45 IEEE 802 1d including spanning tree Default Static RIP1 RFC 1058 RIP2 RFC 2453 IPCP for IP Packet Processing Server Client RFC 2131 Relay Agent PPPoA PAP CHAP IPC
8. 2 On the Router Modification menu type T to select Remove the Default Route The default route is immediately deleted and the Route Table is updated Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Config uring DNS Client 114 DNS Client allows the IAD to use fully qualified domain names for example www verilink com To configure the IAD as a DNS Client type N on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the DNS Client menu Figure 5 4 DNS Client Menu KKRKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK DNS Client Menu KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KK A Set DNS Server IP Address T Set DNS Server Timeout S Display DNS Cache and Statistics The tasks in this section originate at the DNS Client menu Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the corresponding section Setting the DNS Server IP Address To set the IP address of the DNS Server 1 Onthe DNS Client menu type A to select Set DNS Server IP Address 2 The IAD displays the current address and a prompt Current DNS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new DNS Server IP address Type the new DNS server address and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the configuration and displays the DNS Client menu 4 Continue with other configura
9. Type N to on the Multicast Configuration menu to show the PIM Neighbor The IAD displays the neighbor for each interface and its expiration times PIM Neighbor NULL Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet Press any key to continue NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration 188 NetEngine IAD User Guide 11 NAT Configuration This chapter describes the steps required to configure Network Address Translation NAT NAT multiplexes traffic from the internal network and presents it to the Internet as if it is from a single source that has only one IP address The NAT Local Server may be configured with a range of both TCP and UDP ports which benefits applications including video conferencing and multi user games Setting up IP networks without NAT may be complex each requires an IP address subnet mask a DNS address and a default router NAT reduces this complexity by Modifying IP addresses and checksum without affecting traffic Automatic network configuration when using DHCP Packet level filtering and routing Traffic logging NOTE If you enter an element of NAT information incorrectly the network connection will not function and there may be no indication of what is wrong m This chapter contains the following topics Using the NAT Configuration menu page 190 Enabling and Disabling Enabling NAT Translation page 191 Configuring a NAT Local Server page 192 Conf
10. IP Over Bridging IP Over Bridging is intended for use then the IAD is in full bridged mode but remote access Telnet and or user authentication RADIUS are required To implement IP Over Bridging enable bridging globally and by port on the WAN connection At least one DLCI PVC must be configured and assign an IP address to the WAN interface When these conditions exist either in Routing or Bridging configuration the IAD will prompt you to enable or disable IP Over Bridging When the IP address is unconfigured IP Over Bridging is disabled automatically The IAD will also prompt you to enable or disable IP Over Bridging when bridging is being enabled on an interface that already has an IP address assigned When an IP address is unconfigured or when bridging is disabled globally or on an interface port IP Over Bridging is disable automatically When IP Over Bridging is enabled the IAD examines all Ethernet packets that have its MAC address as a destination The ARP packets and IP packets with a destination IP address that is assigned to an interface on the IAD are processed as IP packets normally are including APR resolution All other packets are processed in the usual way that a bridge processes them When the IAD should send an IP packet out for example in response to a Ping or RADIUS authentication the ARP resolution is performed in a similar manner as accomplished on Ethernet If the destination Mac address is not k
11. Oe A a a E g Inter arrival jitter is the difference in relative transit time for two packets It is the difference between the packet s RTP time stamp and the receiver s clock at the time of arrival of the packet As shown in the equation below this is equivalent to the difference in the relative transit time for two packets the relative transit time is the difference between a packet s RTP time stamp and the receivers clock at the time of arrival measured in the same units If Si is the RTP time stamp from packet i and Ri is the time of arrival in RTP time stamp units for packet i then for two packets i and j D may be expressed as D ij Rj Ri Sj Si Rj Sj Ri Si The interval jitter is calculated continuously as each data packet i is received from source SSRC n using this difference D for that packet and of the previous packet i 1 in order of arrival not necessarily in sequence according to the formula J J D i l i J 16 The Jitter Delay should only be set by a Network Administrator To set jitter delay 0 to 50 ms default 0 ms follow these steps 1 Type J on the Voice Configuration menu to select Set Jitter Delay 2 The IAD displays this prompt Enter number of ms to delay 10 Type the delay value and press Enter 3 The IAD saves the jitter delay and displays the Voice Configuration menu so you can continue with other voice path configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path c
12. Receive STF parity errors Receive sequence errors Bad rx OSF sequence errors Bad OSF value errors Receive HEC errors Receive overlap HEC errors Receive CID errors Transmit CID errors Description Discarded packets due to the internal queue reached it maximum size No of STF Start Field parity error received Sequence number in header is incorrect for cells received Value of OSF sequence in header is incorrect for cells received Value of OSF in the header is incorrect Value of HEC Header Error Compression in the header is incorrect HEC Header Error Compression value overlapped Value of CID Channel ID in header received is incorrect Value of CID Channel ID in header sent is incorrect NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 222 Cumulative CPCS 2 Statistics Report Table 12 14 Cumulative CPCS 2 Statistics Report Parameter Maximum PDU Size Transmit bytes counter Transmit microcell counter Tx discarded microcells errors Tx too long microcell errors Tx reserved UUI errors Receive bytes counter Receive microcell counter Rx discarded microcells errors Rx too long microcells errors Rx reserved UUI errors Rx reassembly errors Description Maximum CP 5 Rx frame length in bytes without CPCS trailer Total AAL2 Cells sent in bytes Total AAL2 Cells sent No of transmitting cell discarded due to Invalid Microcell Channel The Microcell is emp
13. 1 The IAD displays the port prompt Port to enable Type the port number and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the on hook timing prompt Number of seconds for port to stay on hook Type the value in seconds and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the off hook timing prompt Number of seconds for port to stay off hook Type the value in seconds and press Enter Displaying Ring Test Parameters Type D to display the current ring test parameters The IAD displays the following information port 2 onhooktime 5 offhooktime 8S Starting and Stopping the Ring Test Type s to start the ring test The IAD displays the menu and begins the ring test on the specified port The ring test continues until you stop the test by pressing option T Displaying the IAD State Type s to display the on hook state for each port The IAD displays the following information Attempting to Connect to CPX counter 0 Port 01 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 02 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 03 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 04 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 05 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 06 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 07 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Port 08 is offhook Call Control state Idle POTS state Disabled Received S
14. 1 Type 1 Configure Physical Interface to display the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu Figure 4 8 G2237 xDSL Configuration menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK G2237 xDSL Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK KEK Current Interface Type is G SHDSL A Mode CPE Rate Mode FIXED Line Rate 88K Debug DISABLED Select xDSL Interface Type Select CPE CO Mode Enable Disable Adaptive Rate Mode Select Line Rate Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages J BWNE Selecting the xDSL Interface Type 1 Type 1 to display the G2237 xDSL Interface Type menu Figure 4 9 G2237 xDSL Configuration menu KEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KKKK KEK KK Configure xDSL Interface Type KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKK KKK Current xDSL Interface Type G SHDSL 1 G SHDSL Annex A U S 2 G SHDSL Annex B Europe 3 SDSL w Type the option to select G SHDSL Annex A for operation in U S Annex B for operation in Europe or SDSL 2 The IAD sets the interface type and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the xDSL Configuration menu 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish WAN configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configur ing the GSHDSL Interface 61 The tasks described in this section all begin on the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu The tasks are described so
15. Internet Port Internet port number Protocol The protocol used TCP or UDP When NAT is enabled you can display the entries in the NAT alias table To display the table type E on the NAT Configuration menu Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 6 NAT Alias Table Report Entry Description Entry number Table entry number 1 to 7 Local IP Address Local or LAN IP address Internet IP Address Internet IP address assigned To delete an entry from the NAT Tables 1 Type x on the NAT Configuration menu 2 The IAD prompts for the IP address Type the IP address to delete and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the table and displays the NAT Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration Deleting a NAT Local Server Entry Deleting a NAT Alias Entry 200 To delete a local server entry 1 2 Type Y on the NAT Configuration menu The IAD prompts for the entry number to delete Enter NAT Local Server Entry to Delete 1 20 1 Type the number of the table entry and press Enter The IAD displays the following Deleting NAT Local Server entry 1 Translated IP address 115 3 3 1 Translated Port 2 Standard Port 3 The IAD updates the table and displays the NAT Configuration menu To delete a NAT alias entry 1 2 The IAD prompts for the alias entry to delete Type z on the NAT Configuration menu Type the number of the entry and press Enter
16. Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port and press Enter The IAD displays the IP interfaces on the port you ve selected IP interfaces on port 1 ID IPAddr IPMask Priority 0 91 1 1 8 255 255 255 0 NORMAL Select a connection Enter the ID of the interface to delete and press Enter The IAD deletes the IP address and saves the configuration Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Setting the Port Maximum Transmis sion Unit 109 The MTU setting controls IP fragmentation of packets transmitted through the specified port Packet whose size is greater than the MTU value are fragmented to fit into the MTU size limit To set a maximum transmission unit value for a port follow these steps 1 Type on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure Port Max Transmission Unit 1 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the current configuration and a prompt Current MTU configuration for SDSL Port 1 is 1500 Enter N
17. NOTE We suggest you keep the shipping container and packing material for future shipping or storage of the unit After you unpack the IAD find a suitable location to install the IAD in the customer s premises Ideal locations include computer equipment room or a telephone or wiring closet You can locate the IAD in an equipment rack on a table or shelf or it may be wall mounted Install the IAD in a location that is generally protected and the IAD will be undisturbed AC Power and Uninterruptible Power Supply The IAD requires access to AC power NEMA 15 3R Make sure the IAD is located within six feet of an AC power outlet Locate the nearest power outlet and plug in the supplied AC power adapter or AC power cord If there is an uninterruptible power supply on premises plug the AC power adapter or cord into that power source Ensure that the power cord conveniently and safely reaches the rear panel of the IAD where the power plug or adapter jack is located 6000 Family Do not attach the AC power adapter or power up the unit at this time 7000 Family Plug in the power cord but do not power up the unit Clearance Requirements If you install the IAD horizontally make sure you maintain at least 2 inches of horizontal distance from other IADs or other electronic equipment to ensure adequate ventilation and heat dissipation If you install the IAD NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide T Connect via Terminal Em
18. To enable or disable IP header compression follow these steps 1 On the Router Configuration menu type Q 2 The IAD displays the port table and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the header compression status and prompt IP Header Compression for SDSL Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable IP header compression on this port or D to disable it If you enable IP header compression the IAD displays the following message Springtide Compatibility mode ENABLED currently not selectable The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 127 Config To set the LAN IP broadcast destination address where all broadcast IP uring the packets received on the LAN ports will be redirected follow these steps LAN IP 1 On the Router Configuration menu type B The IAD displays the current LAN IP broadcast destination address Broadcast and a prompt Destination an LAN IP Broadcast destination Address Enter new LAN IP B
19. VERILINK NetEngine 6000 and 7000 Family User Guide Version 3 5 Verilink Corporation 127 Jetplex Circle Madison Alabama 35758 http www verilink com Copyright 2003 Polycom Inc All rights reserved NetEngine 7000 Family ACOS Advanced Communications Engine and Atlas Communication Engines Inc are trademarks of Polycom Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations The information in this document is believed to be accurate No responsibility is assumed for errors or omissions Verilink Corporation reserves the right to make changes without notice Part 3150 30626 001 Rev F Table of Contents Preface AUdIENCE pesisir nes eee nes ecco eine eect xiii ONS IS cesserit e e ia E xiii I COW ANOS srren e a ei eE xiv Product Warranty ssa tiscctesiivcseenaseaueseciecdsapeeate dim seenaseaiedlege XV Contacting Verilink Repair and Warranty Information XV CONV N ONS iseen E EE EEE EEE XV Regulatory Notices sch esieciceeevsctvateeesdenevecdensiibite ic nbieeiiauceebiv aes xvi Chapter 1 Introduction Data Interface S cecnsinnetelionieracmereaancnsavicsseeeseantsavbraianad sot eein ania 2 NetEngine 6000 IAD Family ccccccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneees 2 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators ceeeee 3 Rear Panel Connectors sisiesincasinscananadewniernenenanasabedebeudvesii wens 4 NetEngine 70
20. indicates whether the UDP port number should be wrapped in brackets for compatibility set mgcp bracketing lt on off gt on off Keyword to enable on or disable off MGCP bracketing NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 251 set mgcp listening port set mgcp notified entity set mgcp signaling connection set mgcp signaling port set mgcp signaling tos Description Specifies the UDP port the Notified Entity call agent is listening on set mgcp listening port lt port gt port UDP Port number any valid port number usually 2427 or 2727 Description Specifies the DNS name or IP address of the notified entity call agent You can specify one notified entity in the CLI Use the menu interface to set up a maximum of four call agents set mgcp notified entity lt domain name IP address gt domain name IP address Fully qualified domain name or IP address of the call agent Description Specifies the call agent slot interface port and connection set mgcp signaling connection slot interface port connection slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 connection Index of this connection number associated with the port 0 7 Description Specifies the UDP port the IAD uses for incoming MGCP messages set mgcp signaling connection lt port gt port UDP Port number any v
21. B Display Bridge Statistics D Display DLCI Statistics Option D displays PVC Z Clear a Statistic Statistics when IAD is Z Clear ATM PVC Statistics configured for ATM To display a specific report type the option For detailed information about each report in the Network Statistics menu or to clear network statistics proceed to the appropriate section ARP Statistics Report Table 12 8 following Interface Statistics Report Table 12 9 on page 217 Bridge Statistics Report Table 12 10 on page 218 DLCI Statistics Report Table 12 10 on page 218 ATM PVC Statistics Report Table 12 11 on page 220 Clearing Interface Statistics Clearing Network Statistics on page 214 NOTE When viewing Network Statistics reports press the space bar to display the next page When you re done viewing press any key to display the report or press Escape to return to the Interface Statistics menu NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports ARP Statistics Report 216 To display the ARP Statistics report type A on the Interface Statistics menu The ARP Statistics Resolution Protocol pack Table 12 8 ARP Statisti Parameter report displays details about ARP Address ets sent and received cs Report Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons Sent Packet Information p
22. Configure Physical Interface lt ___ These options change based on your choice of datalink protocol Configure FR Options NOTE You must sign on as Supervisor to configure the WAN interface Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to WAN settings Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect If you are setting up voice and data channels you can select ATM or Frame Relay as you set up the channels in the section Setting Up TDM Voice following To select ATM or Frame Relay as the datalink protocol 1 On the WAN Configuration menu type 1 to select Configure Datalink Protocol 2 The IAD displays the WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration menu identifying the current datalink protocol just below the banner Figure 4 4 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu KEKE KK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK EKK WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK Current DataLink Protocol Frame Relay 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay This option applies only to IADs E TDM Voice lt WW with channelized T1 WAN ports 6100 6500 6100 or 6500 series IADs do not support Frame Relay NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 57 Selecting ATM or Frame Relay When you select ATM as the datalink protocol the IAD displays the ATM and PVC options on the WAN Configuration menu Figure 4 5 WA
23. Edit a filter of the chosen type Copy filter operations menu Delete one filter of the chosen type Delete all filters of the chosen type Show IP filtering statistics Clear IP filtering statistics OH KON XOQH PH NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 120 NOTE Directly below the banner on the IP Filtering Configuration menu is a message line The IAD uses the message line to alert you that you are working with the input or output filters To toggle between them use option T Toggle input or output type filters to view edit T For more information obtain the IP Filtering Application Note from the Verilink CSN Website or a Verilink representative Each of the tasks in this section originate at the IP Filtering Configuration menu Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the corresponding section Choosing a Port for IP Filtering To set the port on which to use IP filtering follow these steps 1 On the IP Filtering Configuration menu type P to select Choose Port for IP Filtering 2 If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to set 3 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 wit
24. KKEKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKK V Set Voice Gateway J Set Jitter Delay D Display Jitter Delay S Set Start Mode Loop Start Ground Start T Set SLIC Control Mode U Set Compander Mode u Law A Law O Set On Hook Transmission Mode of Ground Start Lines L Set Idle Voltage Mode of Loop Start Lines M Set Debug Mode E Configure Echo Cancellation Default Settings G Set Loop Gain C Set Country Mode NOTE You must sign on as Supervisor to configure voice path T settings Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to the voice path settings Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 141 Setting the To select a voice gateway Voice 1 Type v on the Voice Configuration menu to select Set Voice Gateway Gateway The IAD displays the Voice Gateway Selection menu which contains a list of valid voice gateways for this IAD POTS IADs Figure 7 2 displays the list of valid gateways for all IADs except those with an ISDN telephone interface The order of gateways varies by IAD Figure 7 2 Voice Configuration Menu POTS Telephone Interface KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKK KK KKK Voice Gateway Selection KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KKKKKKK Current Voice Gateway is MGCP 1 0 0 No Voice Gateway GCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 M CopperCom Currently selected Jetstream voice gateway A
25. NOTE For complete information on IP filtering see Configuring IP Filtering on page 119 NetEngine IAD User Guide Firewall Configuration 170 NetEngine IAD User Guide T 9 DHCP Server Configuration This chapter describes the tasks required to configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server on the LAN connection DHCP allows for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached hosts DHCP reduces the work required to administer a large network This chapter contains the following topics Basic DHCP Server setup tasks page 172 Using the DHCP Server Configuration Menu page 172 Enabling DHCP Server page 172 Checking for Additional DHCP Servers page 173 Configuring DHCP Server parameters page 174 Configuring the DHCP Address Range Pool page 175 Configuring DHCP Client Entries page 175 Displaying DHCP Server details page 177 Displaying DHCP Server statistics page 178 Displaying DHCP Server assigned unassigned addresses page 178 Displaying DHCP Entry details page 179 Deleting a DHCP Client entry page 179 Deleting a DHCP Assignment entry page 179 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 172 Basic DHCP Server Setup Tasks The DHCP Server Configur ation M
26. No of PIM Register Stop messages received No of PIM Join Prune messages received No of PIM Bootstrap messages received No of PIM Assert messages received No of PIM Graft messages received No of PIM Graft Acknowledgment messages received No of PIM messages received No of PIM messages received n No of PIM Hello messages sent No of PIM Register messages sent No of PIM Register Stop messages sent No of PIM Join Prune messages sent NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 212 Table 12 5 PIM Statistics Report Parameter Boosters sent Assert sent Graft sent Graft Ack sent Cand RP Adv sent other messages sent Description No No No No No No of PIM Bootstrap messages sent of PIM Assert messages sent of PIM Graft messages sent of PIM Graft Acknowledgment messages sent of PIM messages sent of PIM messages sent TCP Statistics Report To display the TCP Statistics report type T on the Network Statistics menu The TCP Statistics report displays detailed information about TCP Transport Control Protocol packets sent and received Table 12 6 TCP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons with destination port zero bad checksums with headers too small packets smaller than header packets lar
27. Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Config uring Spanning Tree Forward Delay Config uring Spanning Tree Path Cost 137 To set the Spanning Tree forward delay a value between 4 30 seconds default 15 1 2 Type F on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Forward Delay The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Spanning Tree Forward Delay 4 Type the forward delay value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration 30 15 When there are multiple paths to the Root Bridge the Spanning Tree algorithm selects the port with the lowest total path cost as the route port To set the Spanning Tree path cost a value between 1 and 65 535 default 32 768 follow these steps 1 2i Type c on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Path Cost The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT 0 Abort Type the number of the port to update If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of int
28. The following network components are installed list click TCP IP and then click Properties 4 Click the IP Address tab and note the IP address In Microsoft Windows 95 and 98 you can run winipcfg at the command prompt to verify the IP address of your computer In Windows Me 2000 or XP use ipconfig Verifying the IAD IP Addresses To verify the IP address of the IAD 1 On the Main menu type R to select the Reports menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKKKK KKK Reports Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK C Display Current Configuration N Display Network Statistics Display Interface Statistics Display Media Statistics Display Route Table Display ARP Table Display Bridge Forwarding Database Display Bridge Status Display PPP Authorization Entries Display System Uptime Display Memory Statistic Zero All Statistics NOCQCUVMNWHPDABEH 2 Type C to select Display Current Configuration 3 Note the IP addresses for the Ethernet and WAN Interfaces NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration NetEngine IAD User Guide 50 m 4 WAN Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the IAD WAN interface and datalink protocol for data operation Basic WAN setup tasks page 52 Using the WAN Configuration menu page 56 Selecting the Datalink Protocol page 56 6500 Selecting the Physical Interface page 60 Configuring the GSSHDSL I
29. assigned by the IAD Client ID Ethernet MAC address for the device Status How the IP address is assigned to the device via DHCP or manually For the IAD to display this information you must attach DHCP Client devices that use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the IAD NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 179 Displaying Type D to display DHCP entry details The IAD displays the following DHCP information about the DHCP entries Entry Table 9 4 DHCP Entry Details Details Value Description IP address IP address of the device Client ID Ethernet MAC address for the device Status how the IP address is assigned to the device via DHCP server or manually Subnet IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for host ID Gateway IP address of packets sent to destination DNS P address of the DNS server Lease length of time to keep the Internet connection active Type type of IP address static or dynamic Name name of the device For the IAD to display this information you must attach DHCP Client devices that use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the IAD Deleting a Type x to delete a DHCP client entry DHCP 1 The IAD displays a prompt Client Entry Enter Client entry number to delete 1 10 gt Type the number of the client entry to delete and press Enter 2 The IAD deletes the client entry from the table and saves the new configuration 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect
30. connection IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 connection Index of this IP address associated with the port 0 7 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 250 set lan rip set lan stp bridge set mgcp bracketing Description Enables or disables RIP on a WAN IP port If you do not enter any optional parameters the IAD performs the command against the first available slot interface and port set lan rip lt on off gt lt version 1 2Bcst 2Ml1ti gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off RIP on the specified port version 1 2Bcst 2Mlti Keyword identifying version to implement Must be preceded by keyword version slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 0 to 7 Description Enables or disables Spanning Tree Protocol on a LAN port set lan stp bridge lt on off gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off STP on the specified port slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description When communicating with the notified entity call agent
31. helpful if you re new to Verilink IADs because it lists each step beginning with unpacking the IAD It also provides information about logging on using the menu interface setting the IP address basic configuration tasks and restarting the IAD Once you ve read this chapter you ll be well prepared to use the remaining reference chapters Chapter 3 Administration on page 23 provides information about IAD security configuring Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP upgrading ACOS system utilities and other topics Chapter 4 WAN Configuration on page 51 details how to configure the NetEngine IAD for physical connection to the network T1 E1 and xDSL Frame Relay and ATM and TDM Voice for channelized T1 circuits Chapter 5 Router Configuration on page 103 describes the steps to configure the IAD as a router including setting IP addresses static routes configuring RIP DNS Client DHCP Client and other router settings Chapter 6 Bridge Configuration on page 129 provides details about setting up the IAD as a bridge including setting bridging globally or by port setting the aging timer and enabling Spanning Tree support NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface Safeguards xiv Chapter 7 Voice Path Configuration on page 139 describes how to set up voice ports for use in various DSLAM and voice gateway environments Chapter 8 Firewall Configuration on page 169 provides information about setting up the IAD to perfor
32. page 193 Configure the NAT port range page 194 When you have completed these four tasks reset the IAD for the new configuration to take effect NAT is now fully operational Each IAD is configured with NAT disabled To enable NAT translation 1 Type P onthe NAT Configuration menu to display Enable Disable NAT Translation by Port 2 If at least one virtual circuit on the WAN exists and the LAN port is also configured with an IP address or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces sample following on this IAD Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort 3 Otherwise the IAD displays the WAN port table and prompt Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service I O 40 RFC 1483 LLC Encapsulation 0 UBR 2 O 41 RFC 2364 PPPOoATM VC Muxing 1207UBR 3 O 101 RFC 2364 PPPoATM VC Muxing 1207UBR Total 2414 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 1207 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number on which to enable NAT and press Enter 4 The IAD displays the following NAT Translation for this port is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable e 5 Type E to enable NAT or D to disable NAT 6 The IAD saves the setting and displays the NAT Configuration menu 7 Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 8 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuring NAT NetEngine IAD Use
33. 0 255 default 128 1 65 535 default 32 768 ESF D4 FAS FASC CRC4 enabled Multi Frame CAS Multi Frame CAS CRC4 enabled enabled disabled Distance in feet 0 to 133 133 to 266 266 to 399 399 to 533 533 to 655 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB external internal enabled disabled enabled disabled set cleared set cleared set cleared set cleared NetEngine IAD User Guide 205 Table 12 1 Current Configuration Report Parameter Sa8 Bit Rev Clk Source PPP Auth Type WAN port Userid Password Peer Name DLCI Frame Relay Only VPI VCI ATM Only MTU IP Interfaces on Port ID IPAddr IPMask Priority Ethernet address Full duplex Description set cleared Internal External None PAP Client PAP Server CHAP Client CHAP Server PAP User ID PPP password PPP peer name RAW No Encapsulation Proprietary Voice DLCI RFC 1490 ATM RFC 1483 Tunneling AAL5 None AALO None Proprietary Voice RFC 1483 using VC Muxing RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoATM with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing AAL1 CES AAL2 LES maximum transmission unit per port host ID IP Addresses for the ID maximum 8 no of bits reserved for host ID max 8 NORMAL HIGH Ethernet address Ethernet Enabled Disabled Ethernet NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Network Statistics Reports
34. 206 The Network Statistics menu contains commands to display statistical information about the packets handled by the IP routing engine and to clear network statistics for specific protocols Type N on the Reports menu to display the Network Statistics menu Figure 12 2 Network Statistics Menu Display ICMP Statistics Display IGMP Statistics Display IP Statistics Display PIM Statistics Display TCP Statistics Display UDP Statistics Clear a Network Statistic NGQHUWHAOQ To display a specific report enter the option For detailed information about each report in the Network Statistics menu or to clear network statistics proceed to the appropriate section ICMP Statistics Report Table 12 2 following IGMP Statistics Report Table 12 3 on page 208 IP Statistics Report Table 12 4 on page 209 PIM Statistics Report Table 12 5 on page 211 TCP Statistics Report Table 12 6 on page 212 UDP Statistics Report Table 12 7 on page 213 Clearing Network Statistics Clearing Network Statistics on page 214 CR a A a A A a ICMP Statistics Report To display the ICMP Statistics report type c on the Network Statistics menu The ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Statistics report displays details about ICMP received packets sent packets and queries reports and messages sent and received Table 12 2 ICMP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received Total ICM
35. 295 OSI Reference Model Network architectural model developed by ISO and ITU T The model consists of the following seven layers each of which specifies particular network functions The lowest layer is closest to the media technology and the highest layer is closest to the user The hardware and software implement the lower two layers while only the software implements the upper five layers Physical layer the actual wires and connections in the network Data link layer responsible for physical addressing network topology error notification and ordered delivery Network layer responsible for connectivity path selection and routing Transport layer responsible for network communication virtual circuit management fault detection and flow control Session layer manages sessions between applications Presentation layer responsible for data structures used by networked applications Application layer networked software applications such as e mail Telnet and FTP Packet Logical grouping of information that includes a header containing control information and usually user data Packets refer to network layer units of data with messages divided into several packets Some networks use fixed packet sizes others use variable packet sizes Packets typically have standard header information that identifies the packet In contrast frames contain only data information about the frames transmits on the control plane Th
36. 3 The IAD updates the table and displays the NAT Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide 12 IAD Reports This chapter describes the report subsystem in the IAD The report subsystem allows you to display information about the current configuration of the IAD and collect display and clear statistics on various network and media interfaces You can also display reports about routing and bridging and other reports about the operation of the IAD These reports are often helpful when you are troubleshooting to help you understand what settings may be incorrect or to identify the source of a voice or data network problem This chapter contains information about the following reports Current Configuration Report page 203 Network Statistics Reports page 206 Interface Statistics Reports page 215 Media Statistics Reports page 226 Routing Table Report page 238 ARP Table Report page 216 Bridge Forwarding Database Report page 238 Bridge Status Report page 239 PPP Authorization Entries Report page 239 System Uptime Report page 240 Memory Statistics Reports page 240 CR A A a A A A e e e a NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports The Report Menu T 202 To display the Reports menu type 1 on the Main menu Figure 12 1 Reports Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Reports Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Display Current Configuration Display Network Statist
37. 65535 and press Enter The IAD prompts for the translated port number Enter NAT Local Server Standard Port Number 1 6553 5 4 CO Type the standard port number range 1 65535 and press Enter If you did not choose TCP and UDP for protocol the IAD displays the following message Updating NAT Local Server entry 1 Translated IP address 95 4 4 4 Translated Port 100 is accessible as Standard Port 65535 If you chose TCP and UDP for protocol the IAD displays the following Enter number of consecutive ports to use 1 10 1 Type the number of consecutive ports to use and press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration Configuring NAT Timeouts 193 10 The IAD displays this port report 11 Updating NAT Local address 91 1 1 200 Translated Port 32 Translated Port 33 Translated Port 34 Translated Port 35 Server entry 1 Translated IP is accessible as Standard Port 32 is accessible as Standard Port 33 is accessible as Standard Port 34 is accessible as Standard Port 35 The IAD saves the NAT configuration and displays the NAT Configuration menu Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 12 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuring NAT Under normal circumstances the timeout default setting is adequate However if users interact with products including multiple player IP games or video conferencing you may need to config
38. AAL2 Channel Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKKKKKKKKE KK KK KKK D Display AAL2 Channel Statistics C Clear AAL2 Channel Statistics NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 167 Displaying AAL2 Channel Statistics Type D to display the AAL2 channel statistics lt lt lt Audio and Alarm Statistics gt gt gt TX RX CID Audio Alarm Dropped Audio Alarm Dropped lt lt lt Frame Mode Data Statistics gt gt gt TX RX CID Frame Dropped Frame Dropped RasTO BadCrc TooLong 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press Escape to return to the menu Press C to reset the statistics or press any other key to refresh the statistics and display them again Clearing AAL2 Channel Statistics Type Cc to reset the AAL2 channel statistics NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 168 NetEngine IAD User Guide Creating a Firewall via IP Filtering T 8 Firewall Configuration Firewall configuration also known as IP filtering allows you to specify a combination of parameters the IAD uses to selectively eliminate IP traffic Filtering executes on the WAN port that you select There are two different sets of filters and each filter maintains its own statistics Input Input packets are filtered after network address translation Output Output packets are filtered before network address translation The maximum number of filters is 128 Packets pass through the appropriate s
39. Chapter 3 Administration AD SO CUNY e essensen aaae aa Raae En aaa Aia 24 RADIUS Server Settings ccccceeesscceeeeesseseeceeeeeesseeseeeeeees 27 Setting UP SNMP estrone ceteccieeeereeninecevnrtventaulveysypeivabebesteduas 29 Using the SNMP Configuration Menu cceeeeeeeee 29 Upgrading the System sssneeeseeeenneeseeserenesserrrrrnreserrrrnneene 33 Setting up Your LAN Connection ssssssssseesseesrrresseerrrreeeeee 35 Using System Utilities eeecccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Managing Configuration Files 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Using the File SySt M iccicecteccivsciuctonseetevebivetaceieansietiedeeebieniiade 41 Using the Debug Menu ssssssssssrrssssssrrrnesssrrrrressserrrrnneseet 43 Performing File Transfers ccccceiccesccecnteeersnsenntveeteapaeennnncerndnveders 45 Using File Transfer Utilities eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 46 Setting Derived Timing Options cecesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 48 Verifying an IP Address eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeees 49 Verifying an IP Address for Windows Systems 49 Verifying the IAD IP Addresses e cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 49 Chapter 4 WAN Configuration Basic WAN Setup Tasks ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeee 52 Using the WAN Configuration Menu ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 Selecting the Datalink Protocol
40. Command 255 set wan framerelay CLI Command 255 set wan ip address CLI Command 256 set wan rip CLI Command 257 set wan stp bridge CLI Command 256 show configuration CLI Command 257 show dhcp server configuration CLI Command 257 show ip routes CLI Command 257 SLIC control mode setting 144 SLIC Control Mode Selection menu 144 SLIC ports xiv SLIC testing 262 SNMP disabling for IP and EOC 30 enabling and disabling via EOC 30 enabling and disabling via IP 30 enabling for IP and EOC 30 MIB support for 29 setting up 29 System Community configuring 31 NetEngine IAD User Guide System Contact configuring 30 System Location configuring 31 System Name configuring 31 Trap Host IP address configuring 31 SNMP configuration menu 29 SNMP over EOC AAL2 LES 29 SNMP Traps 32 SNMP traps 29 SNMP traps restart max delay 32 Spanning Tree Bridge priority configuring 135 start mode configuring per port 144 displaying 143 ground start 143 loop start 143 setting 143 Start Mode Selection menu 143 static route adding 112 removing 113 static routes generally 112 STP enabling and disabling by port 134 enabling and disabling globally 134 STP debug mode enabling and disabling 44 sync delay setting in Lucent DSLAM 66 system defaults setting 38 system settings saving 39 system software identifying version 34 System Uptime report 240 T T1 switching to 71 T1 configuration flowchart 53 T1 Configuration Menu 72 T1 Configuration menu 7
41. Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Configure Port IP Address Unconfigure Port IP Address Configure Port Max Transmission Unit Add Remove a Static Route Enable Disable RIP Configure RIP Version by Port Configure RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port Configure DNS Client Configure DHCP Client Configure DHCP Relay Configure Telnet Server Port Configure IP Filtering Configure IP Header Compression Configure LAN IP Broadcast Destination Display Route Table ODWOAHHFAAVIQGWDnNEAQ You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure the IAD as a router Options that display in the Router Configuration menu are the same for both security levels NOTE Be sure to reset the IAD page 15 when after making changes to router configuration Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Configuring a Port IP Address in 106 To configure the IAD as a router you must assign an IP address to both the LAN and WAN ports each with different subnet masks NOTE You can assign up to 8 IP addresses on each of the WAN and LAN ports To configure an IP address 1 2 Type c on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure Port IP address If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1
42. Configure DLCls page 93 Configure Frame Relay options page 97 Configure the voice path page 139 T1 with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 56 Configure T1 page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 E1 with Frame Relay er ae cae aa O AOD Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 56 Configure E1 page 69 Configure DLCIs page 93 Configure Frame Relay options page 97 Configure the voice path page 139 E1 with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 56 Configure E1 page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 a weit ae OM ny NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 55 oN 6204c Channelized T1 with Frame Relay vein Brow 6208c 7216c Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 56 Set up data and voice channels page 58 Configure T1 page 72 Configure DLCIs page 93 Configure Frame Relay options page 97 Configure the voice path page 139 Channelized T1 with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 56 Set up data and voice channels page 58 Configure T1 page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 PAROS ee 6300 4 SDSL with Frame Relay Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 56 Configure SDSL page 69 Configure DLCls page 93 Configure Frame Relay options page 97 C
43. Current Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Enter new Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for this entry and press Enter 7 The IAD displays an update option Respond Y to override the default gateway for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for Default Gateway Enter N to use a default value Current Gateway address 0 0 0 0 Enter new Gateway IP address Type the default gateway address for this entry and press Enter 8 The IAD displays an update option Respond Y to override the DNS server IP address default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for DNS Server Enter N to use a default value Current DNS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new DNS Server IP address Type the default DNS Server IP address for this entry and press Enter 9 The IAD displays an update option Respond y to override the NetBIOS Server IP address default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for NetBIOS Server Enter N to use a default value Current NetBIOS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NetBIOS Server IP address Type the default NetBIOS Server IP address for this entry and press Enter 10 The IAD displays an update option Respond y to override the NetBIOS Node Type default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for NetBIOS Node Type Enter N to use a default value KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK NetBIOS Type Configuration Menu KKEKKKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK
44. Enable D to Disable Type E to enable CopperMountain fragmentation Type D to disable it The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Setting Real Time DLCI 1 2 3 4 Type 2 to set up the IAD for real time DLCI The IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLCI Encapsulation al 16 RAW No Encapsulation Select Port 1 8 Type the port number corresponding to the DLCI you want to set to real time The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Configuring the Maintenance Protocol To configure the maintenance protocol 1 2 On the Main menu select Configure WAN to display the WAN Configuration menu Select Configure FR Options to display the Frame Relay Options menu page 97 Select Configure Maintenance Protocol to display the Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 100 Figure 4 64 Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK LMI Network FRF 1 1 LMI User FRF 1 1 LMI Both FRF 1 1 0 None 1 CCITT Q 933 Annex A Network
45. Enter address of static route to remove Type the IP address of the route to remove and press Enter The IAD removes the route from the table and the IAD displays the Router Modification menu Repeat these steps for each route that you want to remove Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration Adding or Changing the Default Route To add a default route on the WAN or change the current default route 1 2 3 4 5 On the Router Modification menu type F to select Add Change the Default Route The IAD prompts for the default gateway address You may press 0 for a list of interfaces Enter Default Gateway address or 0 to pick an Interface Type the default gateway address and proceed to step 3 or Type 0 to display the port table Select default IP interface Port VPI VC Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to select and press Enter The default route is set and the Route Table is updated Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration Removing the Default Route To remove the default route from the Route Table 1
46. IP networks SNMP provides a way to monitor and control network devices and to manage configurations Statistics collection performance and security Subnet Mask 32 bit address mask that indicates the bits of an IP address used for the subnet address SVC Switched Virtual Circuit Virtual circuit that is dynamically established on demand and is torn down when transmission is complete T1 Network connection with a capacity of 1 544 Mbps divided into 24 separate channels or DSOs TCP IP Protocols used for IP networks such as the Internet Intranets and many LANs IP networks are connectionless packet switching networks TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Simplified version of FTP that transfers files from one computer to another over a network WAN Wide Area Network Data communications network that serves users across a broad geographic area and often uses transmission devices provided by common carriers Frame Relay is an example of a WAN NetEngine IAD User Guide Numerics 10 100Base T Ethernet 4 7 6000 family features of 2 front panel 3 generally IADs described 2 rear panel 4 telephone interfaces 4 voice gateways interoperable with 2 5 WAN interfaces supported 4 6104i connecting ISDN to 21 6300 Quick Configuration of 102 6504i connecting ISDN to 21 7000 family features of 5 generally 7000 series front panel 6 IADs described 5 rear panel 6 telephone interface supported 7 USI port on 21 WAN interfaces
47. KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KEK Current Control Mode AUTO Control Mode 1 Set Loop Gain for all ports 2 Display current Loop Gain settings 3 Configure Loop Gain setting per port Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Setting Loop Gain for All Ports To set the Transmit 9dB to 3dB default 2dB and Receive 9dB to 3dB default 4dB Loop Gain values for all ports 1 Type 1 to select Set Loop Gain for all ports 2 The IAD displays this prompt for the transmit loop Enter Transmit Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 2dB Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter 3 The IAD displays this prompt for the receive loop Enter Receive Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 4dB 5 Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter 4 The IAD saves the loop gain values and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue voice path configuration 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 149 Displaying Loop Gain Settings To display information about Loop Gain settings type 2 The IAD displays the loop gain values for each telephone port on the IAD sample shown Port RX TX 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 Press any key to return to the menu Press Esc
48. Loop Current Idle State Voltage Ring Voltage Ring Frequency Gain System Loss IAD 6100 4 6204 8 6204 8c 6300 4 8 6108 6504 8 6100 4 6204 8 6204 8c 6300 4 8 6108 6504 8 6100 4 6204 8 6204 8c 6300 4 8 6108 6504 8 Description 2 5 REN per port 5 REN per port 25 mA typical 23 20 mA typical gt 21V gt 40 vrms at 2 5 REN load gt 40 vrms at 5 REN load 20 25 Hz Programmable 3dB to 9dB Table C 2 6104i and 6504i ISDN Voice Features Feature Ports Line Operating Mode Data Rate Power Description 4 BRI SO ports RJ45 4 wire Tx and Rx pair Full Duplex 2B D ISDN B 64 kbps D 16 kbps 128 kbps available PS1 and PS2 powering for ISDN phone 10 power consumption units pcu port NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 281 Table C 3 6000 Family Digital Voice Features Feature Compression Encoding Echo Cancellation Fax Support Protocol Support Modem Support Calling Features Description G 711 64 kbps PCM G 726 32 kbps ADPCM A law u law G 168 compliant single reflector Digital G3 G4 for 6104i and 6504 and analog V 17 V 29 with external adapter CopperCom ELCP af vmoa 0145 JetStream LES af vmoa 0145 MGCP SIP capable V 34 V 90 support caller ID flash hook three way calling distinctive ringing stutter dial tone call forwarding call waiting Table C 4 6000 Family Data Feature
49. Number of packets and bytes receiving from the Internet Connections Number of active TCP UDP and ICMP connections as well as the number created and deleted Total Fragments Total fragments local to internet and internet to local First Fragments Number of first fragments local to internet and internet to local Queued Fragments Number of queued fragments local to internet and internet to local Deleted Fragments Number of queued fragments local to internet and internet to local Fragment Entries Number of created and deleted fragment entries Errors Number of checksum retries and bad packets Total IP packets Number of IP packets reserved addresses and discarded packets NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration NAT Connection Table NAT Connection Details 197 When NAT is enabled you can display the current open connections To display the connection table type c on the NAT Configuration menu The IAD displays the NAT connection table sample TCP 11 22 13 152 23 lt gt 192 168 1 1 4428 out_port 50000 pkts out 13 in 13 state 4 idle 13 If there are no open connections the IAD advises you Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 3 NAT Connection Table Report Entry Description TCP UDP ICMP etc IP address Port IP address plus port number of the foreign device zero if ICMP protocol IP address Port IP address plus port number of the local LAN d
50. Ohms Belgium2 90 130 25 0 7 150 830 72nF Denmark 90 130 25 0 6 300 1000 220nF Italy 90 130 25 0 7 180 630 60nF Load Impedance 600 400 500 330nF 0 750 18nF Ohms 6108 Ring frequency and impedance settings are automatically 6504 applied to the 6108 6504 and 6508 6508 NetEngine IAD User Guide 6000 Family C NetEngine IAD Specifications This appendix list the specifications for the 6000 NetEngine IAD family including the 6100 6200 6300 and 6500 and the 7000 NetEngine IAD family including the 7200 and the 7300 Where a specification to specific IADs rather than the entire family it is noted in the IAD or Description column of each specification table Table C 1 6000 Family Analog Voice Features Feature Voice Ports Lifeline Support Signalling Line Signalling Dialing Ring Source Impedance IAD 6100 4 6108 6100 4 6204 8 6204 8c 6300 4 8 6108 6504 8 6200c 6100 4 6204 8 6204 8c 6300 4 8 6108 6504 8 Description 4 8 POTS ports FXS RJ11 based on last number of IAD model Baseband failover Integrated on Line 4 Integrated on Line 8 Loop start Loop start Ground Start Robbed Bit DTMF tone Internal 600 Ohms 600 900 Ohms NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 280 Table C 1 6000 Family Analog Voice Features Feature REN
51. Peak Cell Rate Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKKKKK KK ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KEK KK Current line speed for this interface is 2048000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 4830 cells per second NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 83 Type the value for the peak cell rate 7 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the PVC Configuration menu where you may continue with other PVC management tasks 8 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish PVC configuration Modifying a PVC To modify a PVC follow these steps 1 Onthe ATM PVC Configuration menu type 2 to select Modify Existing PVC 2 The IAD displays the following port table and a prompt Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 3641 UBR 2 100 39 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 4 CBR Total 3645 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 4830 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 3 The IAD displays a prompt for the VPI Enter Virtual Port Identifier VPI Type a VPI value between 0 and 255 default 0 and press Enter 4 The IAD displays a prompt for the VCI Enter Virtual Circuit Identifier VPI Type a VCI value between 32 and 65535 the default is 38 for data and
52. Rate PCR Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Option 4 RFC 1483 with VC Muxing supports routing or bridging Setting up RFC 2364 PPPoATM with LLC Encapsulation or RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing 1 Type 6 to select RFC 2364 PPPOATM with LLC encapsulation or type 7 to select RFC 2364 PPPOATM with VC Muxing 2 The IAD displays the current authorization type and a prompt PPP Authorization is currently None Enter New Authorization type 0 None 1 PAP Client 2 PAP Server 3 CHAP Client 4 CHAP Server 3 If you select options 1 through 4 the IAD displays the current PPP authorization user ID and prompt PPP Authorization Userid is currently grok Enter New PPP Userid gt Enter the new user ID and press Enter 4 If you select option 0 None the IAD displays the IPCP IP Address Type menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration F 86 igure 4 45 IPCP Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK PCP IP Address Type Menu KKKKKKKKKKKK
53. Relay DLCls type 3 on the WAN Configuration menu Frame The IAD displays the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu Relay Figure 4 56 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration Menu DLClIs KKEKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK FR DLCI Config Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK 1 Add New DLCI 2 Modify Existing DLCI 3 Delete DLCI 4 Show Current DLCIs To perform these tasks type the option and proceed to the corresponding section The tasks in this section are described beginning at the FR DLCI Configuration menu Adding a New DLCI Adding a DLCI on page 94 Modifying an Existing DLCI Modifying a DLCI on page 93 Deleting a DLCI Deleting a DLCI on page 96 Showing Current DLCls page 96 You may configure up to 8 DLCls on the IAD NOTE Before you configure DLCls you must first set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay If option 3 on the WAN Configuration menu displays Configure PVCs instead of Configure DLCls your datalink protocol is set to ATM instead of Frame Relay T Modifying a DLCI To modify a DLCI 1 On the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu type 2 to select Modify Existing DLCI 2 The IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation Select Port 1 8 Type the port number corresponding to the DLCI you want to update 3 The IAD prompts you for the DLCI Enter dlci number 16 Type the DLCI number to chan
54. Rx Frames Rx Cells Rx Bytes Rx Error Cells Rx Error Frames Tx Frames Tx Cells Tx Bytes Tx Discarded Tx OverFlow Tx UnderFlow Tx Inactive Rx Inactive CRC 32 Errors The size Reassembly Timeouts Frames too Long Description Max PDU size limitation for this AAL connection No of frames received No of AAL cells received Total data in bytes received No of received cells are dropped due to Connection is not established closed Could not allocation internal cell buffer Value of STF Start Field in header is incorrect Cells Overflow the internal queue for storing the cell reaches it maximum size Cells Re Assembly Errors CRC checksum errors No of received frames are dropped due Could not allocation internal cell buffer Cells Overflow the internal queue for storing the cell reaches it maximum size Frames re assembly errors Re assembly timeout CRC checksum errors Total frames transmitted Total cells transmitted Total data transmitted in bytes No of discarded transmitting cells due to Could not allocation internal cell buffer Cells Overflow the internal queue for storing the cell reaches it maximum size Connection is not established closed Transmitting frame is empty size of frame is larger than the PDU size Transmitted Cells Overflow The internal SAR transmitting queue for storing the cell reached its maximum size 64 so it can not hold more ou
55. Tree Protocol globally set bridge stp global lt on off gt on off Keyword to enable on or disable off STP globally Description Enables or disables DHCP server on the IAD set dhcp server enable lt on off gt on off Keyword to enable on or disable off DHCP server Description Sets the DHCP server default IP address set dhcp server gateway lt IP address gt IP address IP address of the DHCP server in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DHCP server default subnet mask set dhcp server subnet lt subnet mask gt subnet mask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 Description Sets the DHCP DNS server IP address set dhcp server dns lt IP address gt IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DHCP NetBIOS server IP address set dhcp server netbios lt IP address gt IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DHCP server domain name set dhcp server domain lt domain name gt domain name Fully qualified domain name NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 248 set dhcp server range set dns server address set ip default route set ip route Description Sets the DHCP server low and high IP address range set dhcp server range lt low IP address gt lt high IP address gt Low IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 High IP address IP ad
56. Voice Path Setup Tasks page 140 Voice Path Configuration Menu page 140 Setting the Voice Gateway page 141 Setting Jitter Delay page 143 Setting Start Mode page 143 Setting SLIC Control Mode page 144 Setting Compander Mode page 145 Setting On Hook Transmission Mode page 145 Setting Idle Voltage Mode page 146 Setting Debug Mode page 147 Configuring Echo Cancellation page 147 Setting Loop Gain page 148 Setting Country Mode page 150 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 140 Basic Voice To configure voice path settings you should complete the following tasks Path Setup Select a voice gateway page 141 Tasks Set the jitter delay page 142 Set start mode page 143 Set Compander mode page 145 Set echo cancellation page 147 Set loop gain page 148 Set bandwidth tone page 150 Voice Path Configuring the voice path settings involves several tasks These are all Configur displayed and accessed on the Voice Configuration menu displayed by typing P on the Main menu ation Menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the Voice Configuration menu Figure 7 1 Voice Configuration Menu KEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKK Voice Configuration
57. and the read write Community Name is null SNMP enters read only mode with a community name of public Type c to select Configure System Location 1 The IAD displays the current community name and prompts you to enter a new name SNMP Community is currently Enter new SNMP Community gt Type the name of the SNMP community to which your system belongs and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Configuring the SNMP Trap Host IP Address Type T to select Select Configure SNMP Trap Host IP Address of the system setup for trap operations 1 The IAD displays the current IP address and prompt Current SNMP Trap Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new SNMP Trap Host IP address Type the IP address and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 32 Enabling or Disabling SNMP Traps via EOC Type U to enable or disable SNMP traps via EOC 1 2 3 The IAD displays the current status and prompt SNMP traps sent via EOC are currently DISABLED To enable traps via EOC type E To disable them type D The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return
58. and utility oriented tasks This chapter includes these topics IAD security setting user IDs and passwords page 24 Using a RADIUS server for authentication page 27 Configuring SNMP page 29 Upgrading IAD system software page 33 Upgrading ACOS page 46 Configuring the IAD for LAN connection page 35 Using system utilities page 24 Setting derived timing options page 48 Resetting the IAD page 15 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration IAD Security 24 To maintain IAD security the IAD provides multi level login access using a single user ID and password which you can set at the following levels User Network Administrator Supervisor The user ID at the User security level may be modified but the user ID at the Network Administrator and Supervisor level may not be modified The password for each security level may be changed Although you may use the same password for all security levels Verilink recommends that you use a different one for each level Table 3 2 lists the privileges available at each security level Table 3 1 Security Level Privileges Security level Privileges Supervisor This user level is the highest level Users who log in as Supervisor have full access to all IAD features menu and command line interfac
59. are done reviewing the report press any key to return to the System Memory Report menu Kernel Tasks Memory Statistics Report Type T on the Memory Statistics menu to display the Kernel Tasks Memory Statistics report The System Memory Statistics report displays details about the kernel tasks Six are shown in this sample report usually 24 or more run concurrently TASK 0 Allocated Size 99KB 101392 Bytes TASK 1 Allocated Size 529KB 541920 Bytes TASK 2 Allocated Size OKB 208 Bytes TASK 3 Allocated Size 10KB 10832 Bytes TASK 4 Allocated Size 35KB 36032 Bytes TASK 5 Allocated Size 4KB 4832 Bytes TASK 6 Allocated Size 70KB 2112 Bytes Type z on the Reports menu to reset all statistics and redisplay the menu This command allows you to reset all statistics using one command To reset specific statistics use the clear statistics command in each report Press any key to return to the Reports menu NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 242 NetEngine IAD User Guide Intro duction set wan stp bridge 13 Command Line Interface The command line interface is often more convenient to use than the menu interface Many of the tasks you normally perform using the menu interface are also available in the command line interface To enter command line interface CLI mode type c on the Main menu The IAD enters command mode and allows you to enter IAD commands described below until you type the exit or qu
60. configuration Displaying Current DLCls To display a list of the current DLCls type 4 on the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu The IAD displays the port list Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 16 RAW No Encapsulation 4 Press any key to display the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 97 Configuring To configure Frame Relay options type 4 on the WAN Configuration Frame menu The IAD displays the Frame Relay menu Relay Figure 4 60 Frame Relay Options Menu Options KKEKKKKKKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKK Frame Relay Options KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK 1 Configure Fragmentation 2 Configure Maintenance Protocol 3 Configure Congestion Parameters 4 Enable Disable Coppermountain CMCP 6200 6300 To perform these tasks type the option and proceed to the corresponding section The tasks in this section are described beginning at the Frame Relay Options menu Configuring Fragmentation following Configuring Maintenance Protocol page 99 Configuring Congestion Parameters page 100 Enabling or Disabling Coppermountain CMCP page 101 Selecting Fragmentation Types To select which fragmentation to use 1 On the Frame Relay Options menu type 1 to display the FR Fragmentation Configuration menu Figure 4 61 Frame Relay Fragmentation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
61. connecting the console cable If both devices are not turned off when you connect the cables you may place the IAD in an unstable state and you may need to reset one or both devices before you can perform configuration tasks Connect the IAD to a PC To connect the IAD to a PC via the console port 1 Turn off both devices and insert the male connector of a DB9 serial cable into the console port on the IAD 2 Insert the female connector of the cable into a serial COM port on your PC NOTE See RS 232 DB 9 Console Port Pin Assignments on page 289 for console port specifications NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide T T Power Up the IAD 1 With the console cable connected on 6000 family IADs plug the AC power adapter into the IAD On 7000 family IADs turn on the power switch located on the back panel This starts the IAD and it executes the boot process to begin normal operation 2 Verify that the Power indicator on the front panel illuminates NOTE As the IAD boots it sends status messages to the console port If you are connected you will see the boot sequence progress Log in via a Terminal Emulation Program With a serial cable connected follow these steps to log in to the IAD 1 Open a terminal emulation program Hyperterminal for example 2 Select the COM port to which the IAD is connected 3 Type or select the following settings and save your changes Table 2 1 Terminal Emulator Setti
62. destroying the factory supplied configuration file The IAD saves the custom configuration file as the default configuration file and displays the Utility menu Displaying the Event Log To display the event log type GI The IAD displays the event log sample shown 0 0 14 890 System reset 0 1 43 225 System soft reset from menu command 0 0 13 720 System reset 0 0 13 735 System reset 0 2 35 53 770 System soft reset from menu command Press any key to page through the log OD O O G Clearing the Last Reset Reason Under certain circumstances the IAD is able to determine the reason the IAD was reset This information is stored and displayed when the IAD reboots and also displayed on the Current Configuration screen Main menu 1 C when known After the reset reason is noted you can delete the currently stored reset reason from the IAD To do so follow these steps NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 1 Type A on the Utilities menu The IAD deletes any existing reset reason and displays the Utility menu NetEngine IAD User Guide 40 Administration 41 Using the The File System menu contains commands to manage files on the IAD To File System display the File System menu type F on the Utilities menu Figure 3 7 File System Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKKKKKKKKKK File System Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKK Director
63. displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting AccessLan CPE Mode AccessLan DSLAM Type 6 to set the IAD to CPE Mode for connecting to an AccessLan DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 67 Setting SDSL Speed for IMAS DSLAM Nortel DSLAM 1 Type 7 to set the SDSL first try speed for connecting to an IMAS Nortel DSLAM 2 The IAD displays the IMAS First Speed Option menu Figure 4 18 IMAS First Speed Option Menu kkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk xk xkxkxkxk xk xkxkxkxkxk xk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk kxx kxx k KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK IMAS First Speed Option Select First Speed to Try 2320 Kbps 1744 Kbps 1536 Kbps 1152 Kbps 768 Kbps 384 Kbps 192 Kbps YHYHAOBWNE Type the option to select the proper SDSL speed The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting SDSL Speed Manually 1 2 Type 8 to set the SDSL speed manually The IAD displays the following prompt Enter SDSL Data Rate kbps Type the rate 144 to 2320 kbps evenly divisible by 8 and press Enter The IAD displays the following prompt Set Data to FRAMED mode Nokia Enter Y for framed mode or any other character if you are connecting to a DSLAM other than a Nokia DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays
64. echoes replies discards Total PPP packets received Discard received packets due to Could not allocate PPP packet from internal queue Discarded all non LCP packets until link is opened Discarded all non AP packets until link is authenticated Value of Length field in the header is zero No of LCP Rejects messages received No of LCP Echoes messages received No of LCP Replies messages received No of LCP Discards messages received Total PPP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets because links are not opened No of LCP Rejects messages sent No of LCP Echoes messages sent No of LCP Replies messages sent No of LCP Discards messages sent Clearing Interface Statistics To clear interface statistics type z on the Interface Statistics menu The IAD displays the Clear Statistics menu Figure 12 5 Clear Interface Statistics Menu Clear Interface Statistics B Clear Bridge Statistics D Clear Frame Relay DLCI Statistics To reset statistics for a specific interface type the option The IAD immediately resets the statistics for the specified interface and displays the menu Continue resetting statistics or press Escape to return to the Interface Statistics menu NOTE You must enable bridging for the Clear Bridge Statistics option to display For more information on enabling bridging see Bridge Configuration on page 129 NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD R
65. for received packets NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 229 Table 12 19 Serial Statistics Report Parameter Lack of resources bytes sent packets sent discarded TX ring full discarded bad pkt or link not ready discarded TX error Tx Clk glitch Tx underrun CTS lost Description Discarded received packets because a PCB for Transmitted Received Pool Buffers could not be allocated No of Data sent in bytes No of packets sent No of packets discarded because Transmitted Ring Pool is full Discarded received packets due to The status of the interface is not Online Transmitted packet length is larger than interface No of outgoing packet being discarded due to Clock glitch and other transmission errors Total frames discarded on this port due to transmitter clock glitch errors No of times that there are no packets waiting in the Transmitted Ring Buffer Total frames discarded on this port due to transmitter CTS lost errors ATM Statistics Report This report displays basic ATM transport statistics at the cell level for all ports and PVCs Table 12 20 ATM Statistics Report Field The link has been up for X hours X minutes X seconds Cells Rx CLPI Rx OAM Rx EFCI Rx RM Rx Rx Cells Discarded Cells Tx Description Total time for the current time has been established No of valid ATM cells received No of cells received with CLPI Cell Loss Pr
66. for the bridge yes no Timers current values of the spanning state timer first value and the hello timer second value The spanning state timer value is for listening or learning states and counts down from the forward delay time to zero The hello timer value is valid only if the active port is the Root Bridge of the network It counts down from the hello time to zero Root priority priority of the root bridge on the network ID Ethernet MAC address of the root bridge on the network Press any key to return to the Reports menu Type P on the Reports menu to display information about PPP authorization entries If no PPP authorization entries have been created the IAD advises you by displaying this message No PPP Authorization Entries Configured NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports System Uptime Report Memory Statistics Reports 240 Otherwise the following information is displayed for each entry Table 12 30 PPP Authorization Report Parameter Authorization type Description None Password Authentication Protocol PAP Client PAP Server Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP Client CHAP Server Slot Interface Port Userid Password Peer Name values for the PPP interface active slot for the PPP interface Press any key to return to the Reports menu Type U on the Reports menu to display the amount of time elapsed since the IAD was reset The sy
67. including the suffix and press Enter The IAD prompts for the name of the new file new filename gt The IAD copies and saves the file with the new name When the operation is complete the IAD displays the File System menu Renaming Files To rename a file follow these steps 1 Type R on the File System menu The IAD prompts for the name of the file to rename old filename gt 2 Type the new name of the file including the suffix and press Enter The IAD prompts for the name of the new file new filename gt The IAD renames the file with the new file name When the operation is complete press any key to display the File System menu Deleting Files To permanently remove a file follow these steps 1 Type x on the File System menu The IAD prompts for the name of the file to delete Enter name of file to remove gt 2 Type the name of the file including the suffix and press Enter The IAD deletes the file When the operation is complete the IAD displays the File System menu CAUTION Deleting files is permanent and may render the IAD inoperative or unable to boot Formatting the File System Reformatting the file system permanently removes all files in the IAD This command is reserved for use by Verilink network engineers NOTE The Format File System command is reserved for use by Verilink engineers Use of this command permanently erases every file in the IAD rendering it inoperative Displaying Fre
68. interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 256 set wan ip address set wan sip bridge Description Sets the WAN IP address If you do not enter any optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface port and connection set wan ip address lt IPaddress gt lt netmask gt slot interface port connection IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 connection index of this IP address associated with the port 0 7 Description Enables and disables Spanning Tree Protocol on the specified WAN port set wan stp bridge lt on off gt slot interface port status on off on enables STP off disables STP slot Enter the slot 1 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface list of keywords port Port number 1 to 8 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 257 set wan rip show configura tion show dhcp server configura tion show ip routes tftp receive Description Enables and disables RIP on a WAN IP port If you do not enter any optional parameters it will find the first available slot interface and port set wan rip lt on off gt l
69. interval No of excess info rate bytes per measurement interval Expected average throughput bytes second No of frames received Received Frame Information Rx Bytes Rx Discarded Frames Rx RECN Rx BECN Rx DE Rx Excess Rate Rx Committed Rate Transmitted Frame Inform Tx Frames Tx Bytes Tx Discarded Frame Tx FECN Tx BECN Tx DE Tx Excess Tx Committed Total data received in bytes No of discarded received frames due to Received Frames are larger than size of PDU Received Frames Headers are smaller than the standard HDLC header size Validity of address bits settings in HDLC header is incorrect Checksum Field value in header is incorrect The received DLCI number does not match the DLCI connections on the IAD No of FECN 1 frames received No of BECN 1 frames received No of DE 1 frame received No of frames received within excess info rate No of frames received within committed info rate ation No of frames transmitted No of data transmitted in bytes No of discarded received frames due to Transmitted Frames are larger than the size of the PDU Packets overflow No of FECN 1 frames transmitted No of BECN 1 frames transmitted No of DE 1 frame transmitted No of frames transmitted within excess info rate No of frames transmitted within committed info rate NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 220 ATM PVC Statistics Report T
70. is for configuring the IAD to use the T1 or E1 7216 WAN interface on the 6200 8 or 7216 IAD Figure 4 21 WAN Configuration Menu for T1 E1 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKKKK KKK WAN Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KKK Configuring T1 E1 Configure Datalink Protocol Configure Physical Interface Configure PVCs Configure ATM Options Be wU Nhe 1 Type 2 to select Configure Physical Interface 2 The IAD displays the T1 Figure 4 22 or E1 Configuration menu Figure 4 23 depending on how your IAD is configured Figure 4 22 T1 Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK T1 Configuration Menu KKEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKKK KK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKK Select Frame Mode D4 or ESF Select Transmit Line Build Out Select B8ZS or AMI Configure Loopback Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Transmit Clock Source Change to El Mode OOMOANHDOKRNE Figure 4 23 E1 Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKKK KKK KKKK KKK El Configuration Menu KKEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK Select Frame CRC4 Mode Configure S Bits Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Clock Source Change to Tl Mode Display Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log VP orrdnHAj UPPER NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 71 Switchin
71. level access NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 27 RADIUS You can use a RADIUS server to determine the validity of unknown user ID password pairs in your IAD To use a RADIUS server set the following Server options Settings Change the primary or secondary RADIUS Server Address Change the primary or secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret Display RADIUS Configuration NOTE T Verilink does not provide a RADIUS server You must provide a RADIUS server to use this feature For more information on RADIUS servers see RFC 2865 If you configure a RADIUS server the IAD must be able to successfully connect to the RADIUS Server This requires WAN configuration IP configuration static or default routes and other configurations for your network Additionally you must use a RADIUS authenticated user ID password for Telnet access If the RADIUS server becomes inoperative Telnet access will not work Changing the RADIUS Server Address To change the primary or secondary RADIUS server address 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu page 25 2 Type 5 to select Change Primary RADIUS Server Address or Type 7 to select Change Secondary RADIUS Server Address The IAD displays the following message Primary Secondary RADIUS Server is currently Enter new Primary Secondary RADIUS Server as either an IP address or name gt 3 Type the IP address in one of the following forma
72. only translates IP addresses for alias entries port numbers are not changed You can create up to 7 direct public to private IP address mappings via the NAT alias table First assign each public IP address using option C Configure Port IP Address on the Router Configuration menu Setting the Ethernet Port IP Address on page 13 to entries 1 through 7 on the PVC or DLCI with a 255 255 255 255 subnet mask Next make alias entries to map each local IP address to a corresponding public IP address These NAT alias entries allow IP traffic to the public IP address to pass directly through port for port to the corresponding private IP address To configure each NAT alias entry 1 Type Aon the NAT Configuration menu to select Configure NAT Alias Entry 2 The IAD displays the following prompt the IAD displays the next unassigned entry Enter NAT Alias Entry to Configure 1 7 1 1 Type the number of the alias entry you re configuring 3 The IAD displays the current local IP address and prompt Current NAT Alias Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NAT Alias Local IP address Type the IP address of the device on the LAN it must be a statically assigned IP address do not use DHCP to assign this address 4 The IAD displays the current Internet IP Address and prompt Current NAT Alias Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NAT Alias Internet IP address Type the new NAT alias IP address and press Enter 5 The IAD displays the info
73. or 8 telephone extensions via 4 BRI ISDN SO ports NetEngine IAD User Guide Introduction NetEngine 7000 IAD Family The Verilink NetEngine 7000 IAD family provides a highly interoperable cost effective broadband solution for voice and high speed data integration that is compatible with industry leading DSLAM and Voice Gateway manufacturers These IADs prioritize voice packets and dynamically allocate bandwidth between voice and data services Features Interoperable with DSLAMs based on Alcatel Texas Instruments MetaLink and Globespan chip sets These include Lucent Stinger TNT Nokia Speedlink System Promatory IMAS AccessLan PacketLoop Accelerated Networks AN 3200 Coppermountain CopperEdge and Paradyne GranDSLAM DSLAMs for example Seamless voice and high speed data integration over xDSL or T1 ITE1 Supports data rates from 144 Kbps to 2 3 Mbps and customer premise interfaces including POTS 10 100BaseT Ethernet Compatible with WAN protocols including ATM and Frame Relay RJ21X POTS interface with Loop Start or Ground Start Universal Serial Interface supports V 35 and EIA 530 Dynamic and static IP routing and bridging capabilities Firewall support via IP filtering DHCP and NAT to support IP address management Management capabilities including Telnet SNMP and TFTP eee o oo IADs in the 7000 family are characterized by different WAN interfaces and different voice capacity NetEngine 7216 IAD p
74. or D to disable it globally 2 The IAD saves then displays the Bridge Configuration menu 3 Continue with other tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration Enabling or Disabling STP by Port To enable or disable STP by port 1 On the Bridge Configuration menu type o to select Enable Disable Spanning Tree by Port 2 The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Config uring Spanning Tree Bridge Priority Config uring Spanning Tree Port Priority D 135 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port for which you want to enable STP If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation I 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port The IAD displays the status of this interface and port and a prompt Spanning tree over T1 E1 Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable STP on this port or D to disable it The IAD saves then displays the Bridge Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each port you want to enable or disable STP Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration The Spanning Tree algorithm selects the bridge with the lowes
75. or disable the admin state for all ports The IAD displays this prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable the admin state or D to disable it The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the Port Administration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Displaying the Current Admin State Type 2 to display the current admin state by port number The IAD displays the following report 1 DISABLED 2 ENABLED 3 DISABLED 4 DISABLED Press any key to return to the Port Administration menu Configuring Admin State per port 1 a Type 3 to enable or disable the admin state for a specific port The IAD displays the port prompt Select Line 1 8 Type the port number to set The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable the admin state or D to disable it The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the Port Administration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 154 Restarting an Endpoint Type 4 to reset the connection between the Voice Port phone and the MGCP voice gateway You use this option if one side of the link incorrectly iden
76. press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Basic Router Setup Tasks 104 To configure the IAD as a router you should complete the following tasks Configure IP addresses on the LAN and WAN ports page 106 Enable RIP poisoned reverse recommended page 110 add a static route page 112 or add a default route page 113 Disable bridging globally page 132 or by port page 133 Disable Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally page 134 or by port page 134 Use this flowchart to plan your tasks based on your router configuration requirements Figure 5 1 Router Configuration Task Flowchart Main Menu All interfaces configured with IP Enable bridging interface per port Enable global bridging Define IP for each interface per port Configure RIP version by port Using default route Add default route to routing table Add static route to Enable RIP globally End End routing table NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Router Configur ation Menu T 105 Router tasks are all displayed and accessed on the Router Configuration menu displayed by typing 2 on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the Router Configuration menu Figure 5 2 Router Configuration Menu kkxkxkxx xkxk xkxk xk xk xkxkxkxkxk x xk xkxkxk x xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxx kxx Router
77. set up Configure Transmit CIR type 1 to select Configure Transmit CIR 5 The IAD displays the Bc prompt Enter the committed burst size Bc in number of bits 0 Type the committed burst size NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 95 6 The IAD displays the throughput prompt Enter the Circuit Throughput in bits second 2048000 Type the circuit throughput and press Enter 7 The IAD displays the excess burst prompt Enter the excess burst size Be in number of bits 8 Type the excess burst value and press Enter 8 The IAD displays the FR DLCI Options menu 9 Press Escape to return to the FR DLCI Config menu and continue or proceed to the next section Configuring Receive CIR To set up Receive CIR type 2 to select Configure Receive CIR 10 The IAD displays the Bc prompt Enter the committed burst size Bc in number of bits 0 Type the committed burst size 11 The IAD displays the throughput prompt Enter the Circuit Throughput in bits second 2048000 Type the circuit throughput and press Enter 12 The IAD displays the excess burst prompt Enter the excess burst size Be in number of bits 8 Type the excess burst value and press Enter 13 The IAD displays the FR DLCI Options menu 14 Press Escape to return to the FR DLCI Config menu and continue Configuring FRF 12 Fragmentation To configure FRF 12 fragmentation type 3 to display the End to End Fragmentation menu
78. sets the speed to manual framed Nokia or Auto Cycle Nokia set sdsl speed lt speed gt lt auto manual gt speed Keyword identifying speed 2320 1744 1536 1152 768 384 192 auto manual Keyword identifying manual or auto cycle for Nokia Description Sets the system to the default parameters set system defaults Description Sets the PPPoATM options RFC 2364 VC muxing PVCs as well as LLC Encapsulation PVCs If authorization is PAP or CHAP you must specify an authentication type UserID and password set wan atm ppp auth lt NONE PAP CHAP gt lt ID gt lt password gt slot interface port NONE PAP CHAP Keyword to select authorization type ID PPP user ID password PPP password slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 254 set wan atm vc set wan bridge Description Sets an ATM VC on a given WAN port RFC 1483 and RFC 2364 VC Muxing PVCs as well as LLC Encapsulation PVCs You must specify VPI number VCI number and RFC encapsulation type If you do not enter any optional parameters it will find the first WAN slot interface and port set wan atm vc lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt 1483 2364 gt slot interface port vpi Virtual Port Identifier 0 255 vci Virtual Circuit Identifier 32 65535 default is 38 for data an
79. supported 7 A AAL Statistics report 222 AALO Encapsulation setting in PVC 83 AAL1 CPCS Statistics report 220 AAL1 CES setting up in PVC 87 AAL2 Audio Profile menu 87 AAL2 Statistics report 221 AAL2 LES 282 AAL2 LES CAS configuring 161 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP configuring 165 AAL2 LES setting up in PVC 88 AAL5 Encapsulation setting in PVC 83 AC power 4 access required 10 for 7000 series IADs 7 AC power adapter 10 AC power cord 10 used with extensions xiv Accelerated 282 Accelerated Networks 2 5 AAL2 LES configuration 161 AccessLan 66 in Quick Configuration 102 AccessLan PacketLoop 2 5 ACOS software and application development 36 ACOS updating 46 Adaptive Rate mode selecting 62 Index Adaptive Rate mode setting 64 ADSL connecting to IAD 21 ADSL interface configuring 69 ADSL Standard Startup menu 69 af vmoa 0145 282 A Law 145 AMI 73 ARP Statistics report 216 ARP Table report 238 ATM configuring generally 90 EmptyCells configuring 92 F4 OAM Type configuring 91 F4 OAM VPI configuring 90 in Quick Configuration 102 OAM Loopback sending 91 payload scrambling configuring 90 ATM Configuration menu 90 ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu 82 ATM pace control setting manually 163 ATM Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu 82 ATM PVC Config menu 81 ATM PVCs configuring generally 81 ATM Service Category Configuration menu 82 ATM transport statistics report 229 audience intended xiii Autobaud mode setting for Conex
80. the SDSL Configuration menu Setting SDSL Interface Mode 1 2 Type 9 to set the SDSL interface mode bit order The IAD displays the current setting and a prompt SDSL Interface Mode Bit Order is currently Sign Magnitude Enter 1 to Magnitude Sign 2 to Sign Magnitude Type 1 to set interface mode to Magnitude Sign or type 2 to set interface mode to Sign Magnitude The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Configuring the SDSL Auto Cycle Speed Table 1 Type c to configure any of the 14 SDSL auto cycle speed table entries NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 68 2 The IAD prompts for an entry Enter SDSL Auto Cycle Speed Entry to Configure 1 14 Type the value of the entry to configure 3 The IAD prompts for the data rate Enter SDSL Data Rate kbps Type the data rate 144 kbps to 2320 kbps evenly divisible by 8000 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Using the Debug Menu NOTE Commands in option D SDSL Debug Menu are reserved for Verilink network engineers P NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configur ing the ADSL Interface int 69 The tasks described in this section all begin on the ADSL Configuration menu You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the ADSL interface T
81. the number on the front of the IAD is the series number 6200 for example The note may reference the actual IAD 6200 8 as noted on product tag affixed to the bottom of the IAD FCC Notice All NetEngine products except the NE6100 4 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a Commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The NE6100 4 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not in stalled and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interfe
82. the settings for each country code setting supported by the IAD When you select a specific country mode the Table B 1 Country Code Settings USA Australia 1 and 2 and Germany Parameters Min Flash Hook ms Max Flash Hook ms Ring Frequency Hz Receive Gain dB Transmit Gain dB Ref Input Impedance Ohms Load Impedance Ohms USA Australiat 300 40 1550 140 20 25 2 0 4 7 600 600 200 820 120nF 200 820 120nF Australia2 40 140 25 0 7 600 600 Germany 90 130 25 0 7 220 820 115nF 220 820 115nF Table B 2 Country Code Settings France ETSI United Kingdom and Belgium1 Parameters Min Flash Hook ms Max Flash Hook ms Ring Frequency Hz Receive Gain dB Transmit Gain dB Ref Input Impedance Ohms Load Impedance Ohms France ETSI 90 90 130 130 50 25 1 9 0 8 9 7 220 820 270 115nF 137nF 600 270 137nF 750 750 United Kingdom 90 130 25 1 6 300 220nF 370 310nF 1000 620 Belgium1 90 130 25 0 7 150 830 72nF 150 830 72nF NetEngine IAD User Guide Country Codes 278 Table B 3 Country Code Settings Belgium2 Denmark and Italy Parameters Min Flash Hook ms Max Flash Hook ms Ring Frequency Hz Receive Gain dB Transmit Gain dB Ref Input Impedance
83. 0 T1 Frame Mode menu 72 T1 interface configuring 72 T1 E1 connecting to IAD 21 TCP Statistics report 212 TDM Voice setting up channels for 58 TdSoft 282 technical support contacting Verilink for xv telephone devices connecting to IAD 21 Telephones connecting 20 Telnet connecting 16 server port configuring 119 Telnet Server configuring port for 119 terminal emulator settings 12 terminal emulator connecting 11 TFTP to transfer files 45 used to upgrade 33 using to upgrade IAD system 33 tftp receive CLI Command 257 TFTP Server Menu 47 TFTP Servers LAN or WAN 33 timeout period setting 37 timeout default session setting 11 Tollbridge 282 trace route using 37 transmit and receive channels configuring for E1 78 transmit and receive channels configuring for T1 74 Transmit CIR configuring for DLCI 94 transmit clock source configuring for E1 79 Transmit Clock Source configuring for T1 75 troubleshooting generally 266 267 Tx Clock Source menu 79 U UART port 36 UDP Statistics report 213 UL statement xviii u Law 145 Uninterruptible Power supply see UPS Universal Serial Interface 5 7 Universal Serial Interface port 21 Universal Serial Interface connecting 21 upgrading IAD system software 33 UPS 10 user ID changing 26 limits of 25 using with RADIUS Server 27 User IDs 12 USI connecting to IAD 21 setting up port 37 USI module UART port 36 USI port pinouts 291 USI serial statistics report 22
84. 0 to RS 449 Black Box provides a cable EDN57J By notifying you of their availability Verilink neither endorses or recommends these products For USI port pinouts when configured as RS 530 V 35 or RS 449 see Table D 9 on page 291 RS 232 Console Port Connects the IAD to a PC using a straight through 9 pin serial DB9 RS 232 cable for the purpose of using a terminal emulator for configuration and management Telephone Interfaces Each 7000 family IAD supports 16 analog telephones via an RJ 11 jack NetEngine IAD User Guide Introduction NetEngine IAD User Guide T 2 Quick Start Guide This chapter describes the steps to install connect and set the IP address of the NetEngine IAD It introduces the menu interface and describes how to perform basic configuration for common LAN and WAN environments It also describes basic operations resetting the IAD and logging off In many cases all the information you need to get an IAD up and running in a customer s premises is contained in this single chapter This chapter contains the following topics Unpacking the IAD page 10 Installing the IAD page 10 Connecting via Terminal Emulator page 11 Resetting the IAD page 10 Powering up the IAD page 12 Logging on to the IAD page 12 Setting the Ethernet port IP address page 13 Connecting via Telnet page 16 Basic IAD configuration page 20 Connecting the LAN WAN USI and Telephones page 20 Confirmi
85. 00 IAD Family ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaaees 5 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators ceeeee 5 Rear Panel Connectors ccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesnaaeaaaaeeeeeeees 6 Chapter 2 Quick Start Guide Unpacking the TAD cic sacecaieticetienceaieedaveni ea arescanei daa Race bcenitane 10 Installing the IAD elites tatsezaleatvaave ttetheceuadabedlalen ey gaeadel sad baavedandevacs 10 Connect via Terminal EMUIatol 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 Setting the Ethernet Port IP Address cccceceeteeeeees 13 Resetting the IAD ve ce caciencicaprasciantnered sevanc daueceaneeenessoepiataneasenine 15 Connecting via Telnet scsiscc ivescvctiets ee lavebivebaneitleleeiviiaeedieiiae 16 R nning TUNG sceiseisees aie va vee iesy evap evevavevacuevevevenadetedevariadene 16 iii NetEngine IAD User Guide Using the Menu Interface a iscsstiscess Sexcencetvansiavteuteextenvevartiektees bes uae 17 Basic IAD Configuration scscesasie tem cetiveetnit ucts 20 Connecting LAN WAN USI and Telephones 0 08 20 Ethernet LAN Connection ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeee 20 WAN CONMGCHONS i cracndeamsnnvcucenearedesunmenentenvens vaceeecteevescccent 20 USI Connection 7200 7300 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 21 Telephone Connections ccccccecseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 Confirming Proper Setup teccinicevanseriddes poeeetsiiauteeeaeeceyces 22
86. 2 22 on page 233 G7070 ADSL Statistics Report Table 12 23 on page 235 POTS Statistics Report Table 12 24 on page 236 BRI Statistics Report Table 12 25 on page 237 Clearing a Statistic Clearing Network Statistics on page 214 CAR E A E E A E g NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 227 Frame Relay Statistics Report Type F to display the Frame Relay Statistics report This report displays basic about Frame Relay operations on the WAN link for all ports and DLCIs Table 12 18 Frame Relay Statistics Report Parameter Received Data Rx Frames Rx Bytes Rx Frames discarded DE set on Rx FECN set on Rx BECN set on Rx Rx congestion counter CLLM frames Rx LMI frames Rx ANSI frames Rx Transmitted Data Tx Frames Tx Bytes Tx Frames discarded DE set on Tx FECN set on Tx Description No of frames received No of total bytes received No of Frame Relay received packets discarded due to Received Frames are larger than size of PDU Received Frames Headers are smaller than the standard HDLC header size Validity of address bits settings in the HDLC header is incorrect Value of Checksum Field in header is incorrect The received DLCI number does not match the DLCI connections on the IAD Indicates Discard Eligibility is allowed on incoming frames based on congestion to maintain committed information rate Forward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify D
87. 2 CCITT Q 933 Annex A User 3 CCITT 9 933 Annex A Both 4 ANSI T1 617 Annex D Network 5 ANSI T1 617 Annex D User 6 ANSI T1 617 Annex D Both Tes 8 g 4 Type the number that corresponds to the protocol on your network and press Enter 5 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Configuring the Congestion Parameters To configure the congestion parameters 1 On the WAN Configuration menu 2 Select Configure FR Options to display the Frame Relay Options menu page 97 3 Select Configure Congestion Parameters to display the FR Congestion Configuration menu Figure 4 65 Frame Relay Congestion Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK FR Congestion Configuration a KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK a a a a a a a a a 1 Configure Transmit Congestion Parameters 2 Configure Receive Congestion Parameters 4 Do one of the following A Select Configure Transmit Congestion Parameters and then follow the on screen messages to set FECN BECN condition set size FECN BECN condition clear size FECN BECN max number of bytes to store B Select Configure Receive Congestion Parameters and then follow the on screen messages to FECN BECN condition set size FECN BECN condition clear size FECN BECN max number of bytes to store 5 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration T 101 Enabling or Disabling Coppermoun
88. 39 for voice and press Enter 5 The IAD displays the ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu Figure 4 40 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKKKK KKK ATM Encapsulation Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK Current Encapsulation NONE 1 AALS None 2 AALO None 3 Proprietary Voice 4 RFC 1483 using VC Muxing 5 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 6 RFC 2364 PPPOoATM with LLC Encapsulation 7 RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing 8 AAL1 CES 9 AAL2 LES NBT Select the encapsulation you want to assign to this PVC Proceed to the corresponding section and perform the steps to set up the encapsulation you ve chosen NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 84 Setting up AAL5 or AALO Encapsulation 1 Type 1 to select AAL5 or type 2 to select AALO encapsulation 2 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Figure 4 41 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK ATM Service Category Configuration KKEKEKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK Current Encapsulation NONE 1 CBR 2 UBR Type 1 to select CBR for high priority data Type 2 to select UBR for low priority data 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 42 ATM PCR Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
89. 4 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect You must enable Multicast Routing to send receive and route IP multicast packets Otherwise multicast packets are dropped automatically NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration Configur ing PIM Dense Mode by Port Managing Multicast Route Source 183 Type P to configure Protocol Independent Multicast PIM version dense mode by port and interface 1 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the interface 2 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the PIM status for this port and a prompt PIM DM over G2237 xDSL Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable PIM on this port or type D to disable it 4 The IAD saves the new configuration and displays the Multicast Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks the IP address of the sender of the packet and then finds the best outgoing interface from its normal IP rou
90. 59 The IAD asks you for the starting channel Enter starting channel of this voice channel chunk Type the starting channel number for this chunk of circuits The IAD asks if you want to allocate more circuits Do you want to continue allocating new chunks y n Type Y to repeat these steps or N to continue The IAD asks you to select the signaling protocol for voice Enter the signaling protocol on voice channels 1 Loop Start 2 Ground Start Opt Selection Not Implemented 3 Immediate Start Opt Selection Not Implemented 4 Wink Start Opt Selection Not Implemented Enter Selection Type the option for the signaling protocol and press Enter If you assigned one or more data channels the IAD asks you to select the datalink protocol for those channels Enter the protocol on the selected data channels 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay Enter Selection Type 6 for ATM or 7 for Frame Relay The IAD displays the current datalink protocol saves the selection and displays the current channel settings Press Escape to return to the menu and continue WAN configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Selecting the Physical Interface 60 On all IADs except the 6500 series the WAN interface is fixed On 6500 IADs you may select GSSHDSL or SDSL as the interface 6504 This section is for selecting either GSHDSL or SDSL as the 6504i WAN interface on the 6504 6504i and 6508 6508
91. 65 Performing ISDN BRI diagnostics page 266 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter T NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics Menu T POTS Diagnostics 260 Diagnostic tasks are all displayed and accessed on the Diagnostics menu displayed by typing z on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the Diagnostics menu Figure 14 1 Diagnostics Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Diagnostics Menu KKEKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK P POTS Diagnostics S SDSL Diagnostics B ISDN BRI Diagnostics NOTE Option S SDSL Diagnostics is available only on SDSL equipped IADs 6300 Option B ISDN BRI Diagnostics is available only on the 6104i and the 6504i You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to perform diagnostics tasks Options that display in the Diagnostics menu are the same for both security levels Type the option and proceed to the corresponding section A WAN uplink is not required to perform POTS testing To perform POTS diagnostics type P on the Diagnostics Menu The IAD loads and configures the DSP software module and displays the following menu Figure 14 2 POTS Diagnostics Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KKK POTS Diagnost
92. 8 Utilities menu 33 Utilities menu 7000 36 Vv V 35 5 7 21 V 35 interface for USI 21 V 35 USI port pinouts 291 V 35 setting for USI port 37 Voice Configuration menu 140 voice gateway selecting 141 Voice Gateway Selection menu 141 voice gateways supported 282 voice path configuration generally 140 setup basic tasks 140 Ww WAN connecting 20 connecting to IAD 20 WAN Configuration menu 56 57 70 WAN Configuration menu ATM 57 WAN configuration flowchart for T1 53 WAN configuration flowchart for xDSL 52 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration menu 56 58 WAN interface identifying 54 setting to T1 or E1 70 WAN Setup SDSL with Frame Relay 6300 7300 55 NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN setup regarding use of IAD xiv ADSL with ATM 54 warranty limits of xv E1 with ATM 54 E1 with Frame Relay 54 Xx G SHDSL with ATM 55 xDSL configuration SDSL with ATM 55 flowchart 52 SDSL with ATM 6300 7300 55 XMODEM to transfer files 45 SDSL with ATM 6500 55 SDSL with Frame Relay 55 Z T1 with ATM 54 55 Zero suppression setting for T1 73 T1 with Frame Relay 54 55 Zhone 282 WAN setup basic tasks of 52 warnings 9 NetEngine IAD User Guide
93. AL2 LES CAS AAL2 LES ELCP MGCP 1 0 NOB WN EF 61041 6504i Figure 7 3 displays the list of valid gateways for ADs with an ISDN telephone interface Figure 7 3 Voice Configuration Menu ISDN Telephone Interface KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Voice Gateway Selection KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKKKK KKK Current Voice Gateway is MGCP 1 0 Currently selected 0 No Voice Gateway voice gateway 1 Jetstream 2 AAL2 LES ELCP Type the option number of the voice gateway to set NOTE If you select option MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 or MGCP 1 0 the IAD an option to manage MGCP NCS Embedded Client option O on the Main menu Otherwise option O is not displayed 2 The IAD saves the voice gateway you ve selected and displays the Voice Gateway Selection menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration m NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 142 Setting Jitter Delay 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration When you choose a specific voice gateway the IAD displays option E on the Main menu specifically for the voice gateway you ve selected Proceed to the section for configuring a specific gateway MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 page 151 CopperCom page 155 Jetstream page 158 AAL2 LES CAS page 161 MGCP 1 0 page 151 AAL2 LES ELCP page 165
94. CES 87 setting up AAL2 LES 88 PVC Statistics reports generally 220 NetEngine IAD User Guide Q Quick Configuration menu 102 quick configuration using in 6300 102 quit CLI command 245 R RADIUS configuration displaying 28 RADIUS encryption secret changing 27 RADIUS Server generally 27 RADIUS server 16 RADIUS Server address changing 27 Receive CIR configuring for DLC 95 regulatory notice CE mark xviii declaration of conformity xviii FCC Notice xvi Industry Canada Notice xvii UL statement xviii warning xviii remove lan ip address CLI command 246 REN notifying telephone company of xvi rename file CLI command 245 Reports menu 202 reports list of 201 reset system CLI command 246 reset performing hard 38 Reverse Path Forwarding 183 RFC 1483 setting in PVC 84 RFC 2364 setting in PVC 85 ring test 262 RIP enabling and disabling 110 enabling globally 110 version setting 111 RIP Poisoned Reverse enabling and disabling 110 RJ21X connecting to IAD 7000 series 22 Route Table report 238 route table displaying 127 router basic setup tasks 104 configuration chart 104 configuration generally 105 full duplex Ethernet option 35 router configuration 14 Router Configuration menu 105 Router Modification menu 112 RS 232 console port 4 7 see also console port RS 449 7 RS 449 USI port pinouts 291 RS 530 7 RS 530 USI port pinouts 291 RS 530 setting for USI port 37 S safeguards observing xiv to be posted xiv S Bi
95. Conformidade Atrav s da presente a Polyspan Ltd declara que este NetEngine se encontra em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es relevantes da Directiva 1999 5 CE Declaraci n de conformidad Por la presente declaraci n Polyspan Ltd declara que este NetEngine cumple los requisitos esenciales y otras cl usulas importantes de la directiva 1999 5 CE verensst mmelsef rklaring Polyspan Ltd f rklarar h rmed att denna NetEngine verensst mmer med de v sentliga kraven och vriga relevanta stadganden i direktiv 1999 5 EG NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface NetEngine IAD User Guide XX 1 Introduction This chapter introduces Verilink s NetEngine 6000 and 7000 family Integrated Access Devices IAD and describes their hardware and software You should be aware of the characteristics of each IAD to properly install and configure them for operation in a customer s premises This chapter provides information about these topics NetEngine 6000 family features indicators and connectors page 2 NetEngine 7000 family features indicators and connectors page 5 NetEngine IADs are ideal for service providers offering small to medium businesses or business units a high quality voice and data service over broadband circuits With up to 16 POTS ports and full LAN support with a full range of integrated features each IAD offers toll quality voice and high speed Internet access over
96. Default Settings Configuration menu Enabling and Disabling Echo Cancellation for all Ports 1 Type 3 to enable or disable echo cancellation for a specific port 2 The IAD displays the port prompt Select Line 1 8 Type the port number to set 3 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable echo cancellation or D to disable it 4 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration Setting Loop Gain T 148 If the IAD feeds telephone circuits into a legacy PBX or other equipment that defines transmit and receive levels to the network the loop gain value must match the value of the circuit it supplies the levels set and determined by the PBX or terminating equipment manufacturer You must also change the loop gain value if there is a decrease in power between the signal transmitted and the signal received due to loss through equipment lines or other transmission devices degradation in service or customer perception NOTE Loop gain values should only be set by your Network Administrator To set loop gain values type G to display the Configure Loop Gain menu Figure 7 10 Loop Gain Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Configure Loop Gain Menu KEK KKK
97. Delete A DHCP Client Entry Y Delete A DHCP Assignment Entry C Command Line Interface gt Command See Chapter 13 Command Line Interface P POTS Diagnostics N Configure T Telephony NAT Clock Recovery B Enable Disable NAT 1 Enable Disable a Configure NAT Configure NAT N lt xXMODOW gt R Reset System 276 Debug Messages Derived Timing Enable Disable NAT 2 Enable Disable Translation by Port Dervied Timing Configure NAT Debug Messages TCP Timeout UDP Timeout Port Range Configure NAT Local Server Entry Configure NAT Alias Entry Display NAT Statistics Display NAT Connection Table Display NAT Connection Details Display NAT Local Server Table Display NAT Alias Table Delete IP Address from NAT Tables Delete NAT Local Server Entry Delete NAT Alias Entry P VoicePath Configure Set Voice Gateway Set Jitter Delay Display Jitter Delay Set Start Mode Loop Start Ground Start T Set SLIC Control Mode U Set Compander Mode u Law A Law aoc lt O Set On Hook Transmission Mode of Ground Start Lines L Set Idle Voltage Mode of Ground Start Lines M Set Debug Mode E Configure Echo Cancellation Default Settings G Set Loop Gain C Set Country Mode NetEngine IAD User Guide Country Codes Tables B Country Codes values are set automatically This appendix specifies
98. Deleting a Type y to delete a DHCP Assignment Entry DHCP 1 The IAD prompts you for the DHCP entry index number to delete Assign Enter DHCP entry index number 1 4 gt Ent Type the index number to delete and press Enter ment En ry 2 The IAD deletes the assigned IP address from the Display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses command and saves the new configuration 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 180 NetEngine IAD User Guide 10 Multicast Configuration Multicast point to multipoint is a communication feature that allows a source host to send a message to a group of destination hosts Multicasting reduces traffic on the local network by sending only one multicast packet out to a higher bandwidth relay point Multicasting differs from broadcasting in that a receiver must join a multicast group in order to receive group messages Each multicast group has its own group address which is a Class D IP address 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 This chapter contains the following topics Enabling and Disabling Global IP Multicasting page 182 Configuring PIM Dense Mode by Port page 183 Adding and Changing the Multicast Route Source page 185 Displaying IGMP Groups page 186 Displaying the IGMP Querier page 186 Displaying the Multicast Routing Table page 186 Displaying PIM Neighbor page 187 Ce a a a A a NOTE When the IAD prompts yo
99. Figure 1 3 the IAD contains several connectors The type and position of the WAN and telephone connectors vary by IAD Figure 1 3 Typical 6000 Family Back Panel Connectors POTS Telephone Lines Console DB 9 RJ 11 Jacks Serial Connector a D dem iii c PWR CONSOLE pee Lan LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE5 LINE6 LINE7 LINE8 WAN i J T T Power WAN Module Ethernet RJ 45 Receptacle RJ 45 or RJ 48C Jack DC Power Adapter Connects the IAD to any AC outlet of 90 250 volts via an external 18 volt power supply RS 232 Console Port Connects the IAD to a PC using a straight through 9 pin serial DB9 RS 232 cable for the purpose of using a terminal emulator for IAD configuration and management 10 100Base T Ethernet Port Connects the IAD to the local area network using a CAT 5 straight through Ethernet cable or directly to a PC for accessing via Telnet using a cross over cable customer supplied WAN Interfaces Depending on the IAD WAN interfaces include the following 11 E1 uses an RJ48 connector for the connection GSHDSL uses an RJ11 connector for the connection SDSL uses an RJ45 connector for the connection ADSL uses an RJ45 connector for the connection Telephone Interfaces 6000 family IADs have varying telephone capacity These IADs support 4or8 analog telephones via RJ11 POTS ports
100. IAD If you select XMODEM proceed to step 4 2 The IAD displays the prompt for the IP address of the TFTP server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the following prompt for the file name to transfer Type the name of the file and press Enter To exit without transferring the file press Escape or Enter without typing the file name 4 When XMODEM is selected if the file is not located the IAD prompts you for the file transfer speed 5 The IAD transfers the file via TFTP or XMODEM 6 Perform a hard reset to reset the IAD page 38 whenever you load a new version of boot ROM Performing a normal reset is not recommended NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 46 Updating ACOS Type on the File Transfer menu to display the File Transfer Method menu and download Verilink s Atlas Communications Operating System ACOS to the file system in Flash memory on the IAD The file is stored on the IAD as acos bin The IAD displays the File Transfer Method menu 1 Type 1 to use TFTP or 2 to use XMODEM to transfer the new version of ACOS to the IAD If you select XMODEM proceed to step 4 2 The IAD displays the prompt for the IP address of the TFTP server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the following prompt for the file name to transfer Type the name of the f
101. IGMP Traceroute resp messages sent No of IGMP Multicast Traceroute messages sent No of other IGMP type messages sent IP Statistics Report To display the IP Statistics report type I on the Network Statistics menu The IP Statistics report displays details about all IP Internet Protocol packets sent and received on the network Table 12 4 IP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received packets delivered to upper layer packets forwarded Total IP packets received No of incoming IP packets delivered to upper layer Layer 4 or higher such as ICMP IGCMP PIM TCP and UDP packets No of incoming IP packets forwarded to other route interface NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 210 Table 12 4 IP Statistics Report Parameter discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons with header errors with an illegal source with an illegal destination bad versions bad checksums with headers too small packets smaller than header packets larger than frame with unrecognized protocol with zero TTL fragments received fragmented packets reassembled fragments discarded Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors destinations found unreachable fragments sent packets fragmented fragmentation fail
102. ING INTERFACE eee ee ee a ee ee ee ee ae a ee eae ae ae oe oe oe 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 190 232 5 1 default Press any key to continue NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration Displaying the IGMP Group Displaying the IGMP Querier Displaying the Multicast Routing Table 186 IGMP is a communication protocol that operates between a router The IAD and its local subnet Ethernet connection hosts The router sends periodic IGMP query packets to the subnet to check for any hosts that have joined or would like to join a group Type G to display the IGMP Group The IAD displays all Internet Group Management Group IGMP groups for each interface and their expiration times IGMP Groups Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet 224 0 0 1 Default Local Join Expires NEVER 224 0 0 2 Default Local Join Expires NEVER 224 0 0 13 Default Local Join Expires NEVER Press any key to continue The IGMP Querier is the IGMP router that has the highest IP address among the others It sends periodic IGMP Query messages and handles IGMP Membership Report and Leave messages Type Q to display the IGMP Querier The IAD displays the IGMP Querier for each interface and its expiration time IGMP Querier Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet 140 242 59 65 this interface Press any key to continue Type to display the Multicast Routing Table The IAD displays th
103. K KK KK KK KKKK KKK KKKK KKK ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish PVC configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 89 Deleting a PVC To delete a PVC 1 Type 3 to select Delete PVC 2 The IAD displays the port list and a prompt Type the port number to delete and press Enter To delete the PVC type y or cancel the deletion by typing any other character 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the PVC Configuration menu where you may continue with other PVC management tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish PVC configuration Showing Current PVCs To display a list of current PVCs type 4 The IAD displays the port list with associated PVCs Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service L 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 3641 UBR 2 100 39 RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation 4 CBR Total 3645 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 4830 cps When you re done viewing the list press any key t
104. KK KKK KK KEKE Current NetBIOS Node Type Default 1 B node 2 P node 4 M node 8 H node Type the default NetBIOS node type for this entry and press Enter 11 The IAD saves the configuration 12 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration Displaying DHCP Server Details 13 Type F to display the current configuration of the DHCP Server DHCP Server on 10 100BaseT Ethernet port 1 Default gateway 192 16 1 1 Default DNS server 198 16 1 1 Default NetBIOS server 192 156 34 34 Node type m nod Default subnet 255 255 255 0 Default lease 3600 seconds Domain name one main com Low address 186 1 1 1 High address 198 255 255 255 Client Number 1 ID 4F 92 0D 3E 10 10 Host name grokpc IP address 162 188 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Lease time 3000 Gateway 72 1 1 1 DNS Server 30 4 4 4 NetBIOS Server 190 140 10 1 Node Type p nod Each field is described in this table Table 9 1 DHCP Server Details Field Description Net Interface active slot number Default gateway IP address of packets sent to DHCP Clients Default DNS IP address of the DNS server server Default subnet IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for host ID Domain name defines the entity that owns the IP address For example commengines com Default lease length of time to keep the Internet connection active High address maximum IP address
105. KKK FR Fragmentation Configuration KKEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KK KKK 1 Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation 2 Configure CopperMountain Fragmentation 2 Do one of the following a Type 1 to select Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation go to FRF 12 Configuration following or b Type 2 to select CopperMountain Fragmentation go to CopperMountain Fragmentation Configuration on page 98 Setting FRF 12 Configuration If you selected FRF 12 Fragmentation the IAD displays the FRF 12 Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 98 Figure 4 62 FRF 12 Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK FR FRF 12 Configuration KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK 1 Enable Disable FRF 12 2 Enable Automatic Fragment Sizing 3 Set Manual Fragment Size Type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling FRF 12 1 Type 1 to enable or disable FRF 12 The IAD displays the status and a prompt FRF 12 Fragmentation is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable End to End fragmentation or type D to disable it 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Enabling Automatic Fragment Sizing 1 Type 2 to enable automatic fragment sizing 2 The IAD s
106. KKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK T1 Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKK KK KKK Select Frame Mode D4 or ESF Select Transmit Line Build Out Select B8ZS or AMI Configure Loopback Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Transmit Clock Source Change to El Mode OMAHA KBNE Selecting Frame Mode 1 Type 1 to select Frame Mode D4 or ESF and display the T1 Frame Mode menu Figure 4 25 Select T1 Frame Mode Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKK Select T1 Frame Mode KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Tl Frame Mode Is ESF 1 ESF Frame Mode 2 D4 Frame Mode Type 1 to select ESF Frame Mode or 2 to select D4 Frame mode The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration apron NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 73 Setting Line Build Out 1 Type 2 Select Transmit Line Build Out to display the Line Build Out menu Figure 4 26 Select Line Build Out Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Select Line Build Out KKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK Line Build Out Is 0 To 133 Feet 0O To 133 Feet Short haul 133 To 266 Feet Short haul 266 To 399 Feet Short haul 399 To 533 Feet Short haul 533 To 655 Feet Short haul 0 dB Long ha
107. KKKKKKKKK ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Setting up Proprietary Voice Encapsulation 1 Type 3 to select Proprietary Voice encapsulation over a specific PVC 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Setting up RFC 1483 VC Muxing or RFC 1483 LLC Encapsulation 1 Type 4 to select RFC 1483 encapsulation with VC Muxing or type 5 to select RFC 1483 with LLC encapsulation 2 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 85 Figure 4 43 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK ATM Service Category Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Current Encapsulation NONE Ta GBR 2 UBR To select CBR type 1 To select UBR type 2 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 44 ATM PCR Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ATM Peak Cell
108. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK 1 Static IP Address 2 IPCP Address Assignment 3 WAN Unnumbered IP 7 8 Type the option corresponding to the IP address you want to use The IAD displays the status of the DNS server assignment for the selected port and prompts you to enable or disable it RFC 1877 DNS Server Assignment for T1 El Port 1 is currently ENABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable the DNS server assignment for T1 on this port The IAD reports the change displays the status of the DNS server assignment for the port and prompts you to enable or disable it RFC 1877 Client configuration unchanged Cisco 6400 IP Mask Assignment for T1 E1 Port 1 is currently ENABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable the IP mask assignment for T1 on this port The IAD transfers the IP address and mask assigned to a WAN port to a LAN port The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Figure 4 46 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK ATM Service Category Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Current Encapsulation NONE 1 CBR 2 UBR Type 1 to select CBR for high priority data Type 2 to select UBR for low priority data 9 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration me
109. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK SLIC Control Mode Selection KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKE Current Control Mode AUTO Control Mode A AUTO Control Mode B MANUAL Control Mode Type the option of the control mode to set 1 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 2 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NOTE Voice gateway applications such as CopperCom or JetStream overrides the value set by this command NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration Setting Compander Mode m Set On Hook Transmis sion Mode 145 To set Compander Mode type U to display the Compander Mode Selection menu Figure 7 6 Start Mode Selection Menu KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKK KK KKK Compander Mode Selection KEKKKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KK KK KKK Current Compander Mode u Law U u Law Mode A A Law Mode 1 Type the option of the Compander mode to set 2 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NOTE If you are unsure which mode to use check with your telephone service provi
110. L2 LES CAS Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKK KK KKK AAL2 LES Call Control KKRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK C Configuration D Debugging S Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Configuring for AAL2 LES CAS Type c to display the AAL2 LES Configuration menu Figure 7 22 AAL2 LES Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK AAL2 LES Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK AAL2 LES is MANUALLY configured Port Control bit mapping is 0x00000000 CAS signaling is GR303 ABCD CAS refreshing is DISABLED Idle CAS refreshing is DISABLED Max CPS SDU size is 0 octets Combined use timer is 0 millisecond s User state control USC is DISABLED Dialled digit outband is DISABLED C MANUAL Configuration A Accelerated Networks L Lucent G General Bandwidth M MetaSwitch Z Zhone T TdSoft Configuring the IAD for a Specific AAL2 LES Gateway 1 To configure the IAD for a specific gateway type the option corresponding with one of the gateways listed in the menu 2 The IAD configures the voice gateway for the selected gateway and displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 162 settings is a message indicating the IAD will be configured
111. N Configuration Menu ATM KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK WAN Configuration Menu KKEKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK Configuring G2237 xDSL 1 Configure Datalink Protocol Options 3 and 4 2 Configure Physical Interface display ATM 3 Configure PVCs _ configuration options 4 Configure ATM Options When you select Frame Relay the IAD displays the Frame Relay options on the WAN Configuration menu Figure 4 6 WAN Configuration Menu Frame Relay KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK WAN Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Configuring G2237 xDSL 1 Configure Datalink Protocol Options 3 and 4 2 Configure Physical Interface display Frame Relay 3 Configure DICIS configuration options 4 Configure FR Options 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish WAN configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Setting Up TDM Voice 58 TDM Voice allows you to set up data and voice circuits on channelized T1 circuits You may set up TDM Voice only or TDM Voice ATM or TDM Voice Frame Relay To set up TDM voice on channelized IADs Option E TDM Voice is displayed only on channelized IADs 1 On the WAN Configuration menu type 1 to select Configure Datalink Protocol 2 The IAD displays the WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration menu identifying the current datalink protocol jus
112. NetEngine IAD 7000 see 7000 Network Interfaces 279 280 281 282 284 285 286 287 Network Statistics report 206 Nokia 282 Auto Cycle in Quick Configuration 102 Auto Cycle setting in SDSL configuration 65 Auto Cycle GSHDSL rate mode 64 Framed mode in SDSL 67 setting Auto cycle for SDSL 66 Speedlink System 2 5 supported DSLAM 282 Nortel 67 0 OAM loopback sending 91 on off hook test 264 On hook Transmission mode setting 145 P Paradyne in Quick Configuration 102 Paradyne GranDSLAM 2 5 password changing 25 Passwords 12 passwords default 25 limits of 25 payload scrambling configuring 90 phone detection test 262 physical interface selecting for WAN 60 PIM Dense Mode configuring by port 183 PIM neighbor displaying 187 PIM Statistics report 211 ping CLI command 245 ping using 36 Port IP address configuring 106 unconfiguring 108 POTS 286 specifications 286 POTS Diagnostics menu 260 POTS Statistics report 236 POTS diagnostics 260 power consumption for ISDN telephones 21 DC adapter 4 power supply testing 262 PPP Authorization Entries report 239 PPP debug mode enabling and disabling 43 PPP Statistics report 225 precautions regarding use of IAD xiv product warranty xv Promatory IMAS 2 5 proprietary voice encapsulation setting in PVC 84 PSAX 282 PVC adding 81 deleting 89 displaying list of 89 modifying 83 RFC 1483 84 setting proprietary voice encapsulation 84 setting RFC 2364 85 setting up AAL1
113. P SNMP MIB1 MIB2 Enterprise MIB Console Telnet local remote EIA 530 RS449 V 35 DB25 Table C 13 7000 Family WAN Features Feature Interface WAN Standards Transport Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols ATM Adaption Layers Encapsulation AAL2 Profiles Voice Data Security Voice QoS Data QoS Description 7200 T1 UNI RJ45 7300 SDSL 2B1Q RJ45 ITU T G 992 2 G992 1 ATM Frame Relay CopperCom JetStream TdSoft Tollbridge BLES General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel Zhone Lucent MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 support Point to Point PPP AAL2 voice AAL5 data AAL5 layer 3 voice RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM RFC 2364 PPP over ATM ITU 366 2 AAL2 ATM 9 10 11 and ITU 1 Single AAL2 PVC Up to 8 AAL5 PVCs Software configurable payload scrambling CBR VBR rt CBR UBR NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 288 Table C 13 7000 Family WAN Features Feature Cell Delay Variation Buffer OAM Cell Handling Frame Relay Encapsulation Voice Data Data Link Format Data Link Control Data Internetworking Framing Description Configurable 0 30 ms F4 F5 segment and end to end loopbacks RFC 1490 multiprotocol encapsulation over frame relay Single PVC 8 Data Link Identifiers DLCI Q 922 FRF 12 support adjustable jitter buffer FRF 5 FRF 8 support HDLC support NetEngine IAD User Guide D Connect
114. P packets received discarded for lack of Discarded received packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory packet buffers etc discarded due to internal Discarded received packets due to internal errors software errors NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 207 Table 12 2 ICMP Statistics Report Parameter discarded for other reasons unrecognized codes bad checksum packets smaller than header redirects from non gateways Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Messages Requests and Destination Unreachables received Time Exceededs received Parameter Problems received Source Quenches received Redirects received Echo Requests received Echo Replies received Timestamp Requests received Timestamp Replies received Information Requests received Information Replies received Other types received Messages Requests and Destination Unreachables sent Time Exceededs sent Parameter Problems sent Source Quenches sent Redirects sent Echo Requests sent Description Discarded packets due to these reasons Not used Value of the Checksums field in header is incorrect Size of the ICMP header is larger than the packet size ICMP Redirect packet from non gateway Total ICMP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources such as kernel memo
115. Pin Assignments on page 289 Connect each ISDN cable from the ISDN terminal equipment to the SO ports on the back of the IAD using 4 wire cable The ports provide PS1 and PS2 powering for ISDN telephones at 10 power consumption units per port NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide Confirming Proper Setup 22 Making RJ21X Connections 7000 family The pin assignments for the RJ21X connector are telco standard Connect telephone devices from an RJ11 jack field or a punch down block Each line provides a two wire loop or groundstart connection To perform the connection use a customer provided cable terminated at one end with an RJ21X connector After connecting each color coded wire pair to the corresponding telephone connection on the jack field or punchdown block connect the RJ21X connector to the connector on the IAD rear panel When you have completed the tasks in this chapter reset the IAD and test your configuration Reset the IAD Reset the IAD page 15 to synchronize the physical connections Verify Normal Power Up and Operation Finally to test your configuration for proper data and voice operation perform the operational test Operational Test on page 272 NetEngine IAD User Guide T we Polycom Inc 3 Administration This chapter describes how to control security to your IAD validate users using a RADIUS server configure SNMP via IP or EOC upgrade IAD software and perform other general
116. R Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KEK Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish PVC configuration Setting up AAL2 LES 1 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile Format menu Figure 4 51 AAL2 Audio Profile Format Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK AAL2 Audio Profile Format KEKE K KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK Current Audio Profile Format NONI 1 ITU 2 ATM Forum Gl To select ITU type 1 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile menu with available options Figure 4 52 AAL2 Audio Profile Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK AAL2 Audio Profile KEK KKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK Current Audio Profile NONE 9 ATM Forum 9 44 octets G 711 64 A ATM Forum 10 44 octets G 711 64 G 726 32 B ATM Forum 11 40 octets G 711 64 G 726 32 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 53 ATM PCR Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
117. Router Configuration menu 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish IP filter configuration Toggling Between Input and Output Filters To switch between input and output filter types when using most commands type T To toggle between input and output enter the command again NOTE The filter type that is the current focus of commands is displayed directly below the banner on the IP Filtering Configuration menu page 119 This message alerts you that you are currently working with the input or output filters Displaying Filters To display a list of filters and details first select the input or output filters using the Toggle command Then type D to display the filters and details as shown in this sample T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 255 TCP 0H 0 65535 92 100 1 1 255 255 255 255 0 Inserting Appending and Editing Filters To edit an existing filter add a new filter in a specific location in the filter table or append a filter to the bottom of the table follow these steps NOTE At any time during the creation or editing of a filter you can press Escape to abort the process The IAD displays the IP Filter Configuration menu and the filter table is unchanged 1 Use the Toggle command option T to select input or output filters Next choose one of the fo
118. SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to configure The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter The IAD displays the IP interfaces on the port you re configuring IP interfaces on port 1 ID IPAddr IPMask Priority 0 OF ab 255 255 255 0 NORMAL IP Over Bridge is enabled Enter the ID of the interface 0 7 to configure and press Enter The IAD displays the current IP address and prompts for a new one Enter new IP address for this interface Ole 51018 gt Type the new IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompts for a new one Current subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Enter new subnet mask for this interface 255 255 255 255 gt Type the new subnet mask address and press Enter The IAD prompts you to determine traffic priority on this port Select priority Normal High N H N Do one of the following a Set the interface to high priority type H b Set the interface to normal priority type N NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 11 12 13 14 15 107 Configuration is complete The IAD displays the following prompt Save new IP Information gt
119. TE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by IAD Backward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by the sending device No of frames dropped due to congestion to maintain committed information rate No of CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management frames received No of LMI Local Management Interface frames received No of ANSI frames received No of frames transmitted No of total bytes transmitted No of Frame Relay packets discarded due to Transmitted frames are larger than PDU size Packets overflow Indicates Discard Eligibility is allowed on transmitted frames based on congestion to maintain committed information rate Forward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by IAD NetEngine IAD User Guide 228 Table 12 18 Frame Relay Statistics Report Parameter BECN set on Tx Tx congestion counter CLLM frames Tx LMI frames Tx ANSI frames Tx Last error Description Backward Explicit Congestion Notification status set to notify DTE that congestion avoidance should be initiated by the sending device No of frames dropped due to congestion to maintain committed information rate No of CLLM frames received No of LMI frames received No of ANSI frames received Description of last recorded error since reset Serial USI Statistics Report
120. Type s to display the Serial Statistics report This report displays basic serial HDLC transport statistics on the Universal Serial Interlace port Table 12 19 Serial Statistics Report Parameter bytes rcvd packets rcvd discarded RX Busy Available Buffers PCB Entries discarded RX error Rx Clock glitch PLL error Frame too long Non octet aligned Abort seq CRC error Rx overrun CD lost Out Of Buffers PCBs Description Total data received in bytes No of Serial packets received No of discarded received packets due to packets Overrun Current available internal PCB Packets Buffers entries No of discarded due to the following reasons Could not allocate packet buffers Total frames discarded on this port due to receives clock glitch errors Total frames discarded on this port due to receives phase lock loop errors Total frames discarded on this port because the received frame was too long Total frames discarded on this port because the received frame was not an integral no of octets No of frames aborted on the port due to receiving an abort sequence since system re initialization and the port state was up or test Total frames discarded on this port due to received CRC errors Total frames discarded on this port due to receiver overruns errors Total frames discarded on this port due to lost Carrier Detect No of times that could not allocate a packet buffer
121. Unit Add Remove a Static Route Enable Disable RIP Configure RIP Version by Port Configure RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port Configure DNS Client Configure DHCP Client Configure DHCP Relay Configure Telnet Server Port Configure IP Filtering Configure IP Header Compression Configure LAN IP Broadcast Destination Display Route Table DWOAHHFAAVIQCWDnNEAQ Type c to select Configure Port IP Address 3 The IAD displays the following menu sample all options shown The interfaces that display depend on the specific IAD Figure 2 3 Router Configuration Menu Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL us G7070 ADSL ATU R te TIFEL 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type 2 to set the IP address for the Ethernet port 4 Ifthe IP address is configured for the port the IAD displays information about the interface and a prompt IP interfaces on port 2 D PAddr IPMask Priority 0 92 1 ed 90 255 6209 3250 10 NORMAL Enter connection to configure Type the ID number of the connection that you want to configure in this case 0 and press Enter 5 Type the new IP address and press Enter or press Enter to retain the current IP address NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide T Resetting the IAD 15 6 The IAD displays the following information Current subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Enter n
122. User Guide Glossary 294 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol Transport layer multicasting protocol used by IP hosts to register their dynamic multicast group membership It is also used by connected routers to discover these group members Inverse ARP Inverse Address Resolution Protocol Enables routers to obtain the IP address of a known Ethernet address of a device associated with a virtual circuit Method of building dynamic routes in a network IP Internet Protocol Part of the TCP IP protocol IP networks are connectionless packet switching networks IP address 32 bit address assigned to hosts using TCP IP An IP address contains four octets separated by periods also known as a dotted quad address Each address consists of a network number an optional sub network number and a host number The network and sub network numbers together are used for routing while the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or sub network IP SNAP Sub network Access Protocol Internet protocol that operates between a network entity in the sub network and a network entity in the end system SNAP specifies a standard method of encapsulating IP datagrams and ARP messages on IEEE networks The SNAP entity in the end system makes use of the services of the sub network and performs three essential functions data transfer connection management and QOS selection LAN Local Area Network Privately owned network conn
123. Voice Path Configuration 151 Managing MGCP Embedded Client T This section applies to MGCP Voice Over IP gateway management NOTE The IAD only displays option O Manage MGCP Embedded Client on the Main menu if you selected Voice Over IP via MGCP 0 1 NCS 1 0 or MGCP 1 0 as the Voice Gateway To configure or manage MGCP NCS type o to display the MGCP Management menu Figure 7 12 MGCP NCS Management Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKK KKK MGCP Management Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK Configure MGCP parameters Display MGCP statistics Debug MGCP Remove a connection Port Administration Configure Default Packet Size UPrwnuUNaA Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the appropriate section All tasks in this section begin at the MGCP NCS Management menu Configuring MGCP Parameters Type Cc to set the Transmit and Receive parameters for MGCP The IAD can support up to 4 call agents These may be specified via IP address or DNS name 1 The IAD displays the Notified Entity prompt for the first call agent Enter the DNS Name or the IP address for the first Notified Entity Type the DNS name mg1 acme com for example or the IP address of the call agent and press Enter 2 The IAD updates the IP address of the MGCP Call Agent which controls call setup and teardown for all call features under MGCP for the entity increases the entity index b
124. WAN Configuration menu to display the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu 6500 This section is only for configuring the SDSL WAN interface 6504i on the 6504 6504i and 6508 6508 Figure 4 13 G2237 xDSL Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK G2237 xDSL Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKK KK KK Current Interface Type is SDSL Mode CPE Rate Mode NOKIA AUTO CYCLE Line Rate 88K Debug DISABLED Select xDSL Interface Type Select CPE CO Mode Enable Disable Adaptive Rate Mode Select Line Rate Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages UO BWNE Selecting CPE or CO Mode 1 Type 2 to display the Configure CPE CO Mode menu Figure 4 14 Configure CPE CO Mode Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKK KK KKK Configure CPE CO Mode KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK Current Mode CPE 1 CPE Zs EO Type 1 to select CPE or type 2 to select CO mode 2 The IAD sets the mode and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration m Configuring the Adaptive Rate Mode 1 Type 3 to display the SDSL Rate Mode menu Figure 4 15 Configure SDSL Rate Mode Menu 64 kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk kxkxkx k Configure SDSL Rate Mode kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkx
125. Y Type Y to confirm your changes or press Escape to cancel If you confirm the IAD saves the settings If bridging is enabled and an IP address is assigned on the WAN interface the IAD displays the IP Over Bridge prompt Both bridging and IP address are specified for this interface Currently IP over bridge is enabled Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable IP Over Bridge on the WAN port or D to disable it The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each remaining port to configure Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Unconfig uring a Port IP Address 108 To unconfigure delete the IP address of an interface follow these steps 1 2 Type U on the Router Configuration menu to select Unconfigure Port IP Address If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to which the IP address is assigned The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps
126. a single copper pair in one unit Each IAD supports any POTS device via its voice subsystem and any IP based computer system Ethernet printers personal computers Windows Macintosh Unix Linux etc network file servers and other network devices via its LAN subsystem 6000 Family IAD NetEngine 7200 rover ty OO 0 0 0 UN MAN WAN VOCE DCE o ACT UNK Pee bee VERILINK Figure 1 1 NetEngine 6000 and 7000 Integrated Access Devices NetEngine IAD User Guide Introduction Data Interfaces NetEngine 6000 IAD Family The data connection through the IAD supports IEEE 802 10 compliant bridging and routing When the IAD is configured for routing it supports Routing Information Protocol RIP version 1 version 2 or static IP routing The IAD complies with RFC 1812 when interfacing with Version 4 IP routers The WAN subsystem supports the following interfaces ATM data transport via xDSL and T1 E1 per RFC 1483 or RFC 2364 Frame Relay data transport via xDSL and T1 E1 per RFC 1490 Frame Relay data transport per RFC 1483 with Q 922 frames The Verilink NetEngine 6000 IAD family provides a highly interoperable cost effective voice and high speed data integration solution that is compatible with industry leading DSLAM and Voice Gateway manufacturers These IADs prioritize voice packets and dynamically allocate bandwidth between voice and data services Features Interoperable w
127. abling or Disabling All Channels 1 Type 1 to enable all channels or type 2 to disable all channels 2 The IAD makes the change and resets the interface The menu and reset messages may conflict press any key to refresh the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 75 Enabling or Disabling Specific Channels 1 Type 3 to enable or disable specific channels If all channels are disabled this option enables specific channels Conversely if all channels are enabled this option disables specific channels 2 The IAD displays this prompt Select Channel to Enable Disable then press Enter For each channel type the number and press Enter When you have entered all channels to enable or disable press Enter 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the T1 Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration Selecting a Channel Range 1 Type 4 to enable a range of channels 2 The IAD displays the channel status and a prompt Tx Channels Enabled No Channels Enabled Select a Channel Range to Enable Available Range 1 to 24 First Channel of Range gt Type the beginning channel and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the second prompt Last Channel of Range gt Type the ending channel to enable and press Enter 4 The IAD makes the change and saves the configuration and displays the T1 Configuration menu 5 Continue w
128. acacusticinneiasnnneso ees nevenevende caveevessusawceccess 119 Configuring IP Header Compression IPHC ce 126 Configuring the LAN IP Broadcast Destination 127 Displaying the Route Table ssrcccccacsceteteccaseenscietenorsencscteceueceeaese 127 Chapter 6 Bridge Configuration Basic Bridge Setup Tasks ccceceseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 130 Bridge Configuration M nu eeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeees 131 Enabling and Disabling Broun escceccesensstccccvesieevccrecaseeesceae 132 P Over Bridging scesisecisrikisimnnn ianiai 132 Enabling or Disabling Bridging Globally e 132 Enabling or Disabling Bridging by Port eeee 133 Setting the Bridge Aging Timel cccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 134 Enabling and Disabling STP ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 134 Enabling or Disabling STP Globally eteeeeeeeees 134 Enabling or Disabling STP by Poft ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 134 Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Priority 0 ceee 135 Configuring Spanning Tree Port Priority ceeeeee 135 Configuring Spanning Tree Hello Time eeeeeeeeeeees 136 Configuring Spanning Tree Maximum Ag 0ceeee 136 Configuring Spanning Tree Forward Delay cccccceees 137 Configuring Spanning Tree Path Cost ccccccccceeeteeeeeeees 137 Deleting a Bridge Forwarding Da
129. ackets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Reply and Request Messa valid requests rcvd valid replies revd requests sent replies sent ARP_alloc returned NULL cache misses discarded missing ARP entry Total ARP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to other reasons Value of Hardware Field in ARP header is not corresponding to Ethernet Value of Protocol Type Field in ARP header is not corresponding to IP Value of Hardware Length in ARP header is not the size of the MAC address 6 bytes Value of Protocol Type Length Field in ARP header is not the size of the IP address 4 bytes Value of Operation Code Field in ARP header is not ARP Request and ARP Response The ARP IP address is not a local IP address located on the IAD Total ARP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitted packets due to the type of the code are incorrect Not Being Used ges No of valid ARP Request message received No of valid ARP Replies message received No of valid ARP Request message sent No of valid ARP Replies message sent No of error of a
130. address of the Ethernet port you must reset or restart the IAD for the new settings to take effect An alternative to issuing the reset command is to simply turn off or unplug the IAD and power it back on forcing it to reboot CAUTION Rebooting the IAD terminates all telephone calls in process and data sessions in process Ensure that there are no services being rendered before you reset the IAD Description Removes the LAN IP address If you do not enter any optional parameters the IAD locates and removes the first available slot interface port and connection remove lan ip address lt IP address gt lt netmask gt slot interface port connection IP address IP address to remove in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 connection Index of this IP address associated with the port 0 7 Description Enable or disables bridging globally set bridge global lt on off gt on off Keyword to enable on or disable off bridging globally NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 247 set bridge stp global set dhcp server enable set dhcp server gateway set dhcp server subnet set dhcp server dns set dhcp server netbios set dhcp server domain Description Enables or disables Spanning
131. alfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each relevant terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 Underwriters Laboratories Statement These systems are intended to be powered only by the power supply unit provided CE Mark These NetEngine products have been marked with the CE mark This mark indicates compliance with EEC Directives 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC 1999 5 EC Warning All NetEngine products except NE6100 4 are Class A products In a domestic environment these products may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures A full copy of the declaration of Conformity c
132. alid port number usually 2427 Description Specifies the TOS byte value for signaling packets set mgcp signaling tos lt byte value gt byte value Integer 1 7 to specify the TOS byte value NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 252 set mgcp voice connection set mgcp voice tos set nat Description Specifies the slot interface port and connection for the voice connection set mgcp voice connection slot interface port connection slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 connection connection Index of this connection number associated with the port 0 7 Description Specifies the TOS byte value for RTP voice packets set mgcp voice tos lt byte value gt byte value Integer 1 7 to specify the TOS byte value Description Enables or disables NAT on the specified port If you do not enter any optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface and port set nat lt on off gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off NAT on the specified port slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 253 set sdsl speed set system defaults set wan atm ppp auth Description Sets the SDSL speed This command
133. an be obtained from Polyspan Ltd Whichford House Parkway Court Oxford Business Park South Oxford OX4 2JY UK Declaration of Conformity Hereby Polyspan Ltd declares that this NetEngine is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface xix Konformitetserkleering Hermed erkleerer Polyspan Ltd at indestaende NetEngine er i overensstemmelse med de grundl ggende krav og de relevante punkter i direktiv 1999 5 EF Konformitatserklarung Hiermit erklart Polyspan Ltd dass der NetEngine die grundlegenden Anforderungen und sonstige ma gebliche Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG erf llt Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus Polyspan Ltd vakuuttaa t ten ett NetEngine on direktiivin 1999 5 EC keskeisten vaatimusten ja sen muiden t t koskevien s nn sten mukainen D claration de conformit Par la pr sente Polyspan Ltd d clare que ce NetEngine est conforme aux conditions essentielles et toute autre modalit pertinente de la Directive 1999 5 CE Dichiarazione di conformit Con la presente Polyspan Ltd dichiara che il NetEngine soddisfa i requisiti essenziali e le altre disposizioni pertinenti della direttiva 1999 5 CE Verklaring van overeenstemming Hierbij verklaart Polyspan Ltd dat diens NetEngine voldoet aan de basisvereisten en andere relevante voorwaarden van EG richtlijn 1999 5 EG Declara o de
134. ant DSLAM 66 B B8ZS 73 boot ROM file loading 45 BRI 2 3 4 21 BRI Diagnostics menu 266 BRI Statistics report 237 Bridge Aging Timer setting 134 Bridge Configuration Menu 131 Bridge Configuration menu 131 Bridge Forwarding Database report 238 Bridge Statistics report 218 Bridge Status report 239 bridging bridge aging timer setting 134 configuration task flowchart 130 enabling and disabling 132 enabling or disabling by port 133 enabling or disabling globally 132 IP over 132 setup basic tasks of 130 Spanning Tree Bridge Priority setting 135 STP enabling 134 STP enabling by port 134 NetEngine IAD User Guide Cc CE mark xviii Channel Configuration menu 74 78 Cisco 282 supported DSLAM 282 CODEC testing 262 command line interface reference 245 command line interface generally 243 Compander Mode Selection menu 145 Compander Mode setting 145 Conexant 66 configuration files managing 38 configuration basic steps 20 Configure CPE CO Mode 62 Configure GSHDSL RATE Mode 62 Configure xDSL Interface Type 60 congestion parameters setting in FR 100 connecting systems 20 console port 4 7 setting baud rate setting timeout period 37 contents described xiii conventions described xv Copper Mountain 2 5 282 Auto Sense in Quick Configuration 102 Auto Sense setting 66 Auto Sense setting in SDSL configuration 65 fragmentation setting 99 supported DSLAM 282 Copper Mountain CMCP setting in Frame Rela
135. anumeric characters 1 The IAD displays the current system contact and prompt System Contact is currently Verilink Enter new System Contact gt Type the name of the new contact person or department and press Enter 2 The IAD save the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 31 Configuring the System Name Type N to configure the system name up to 39 alphanumeric characters 1 The IAD displays the current system name and prompt System Description is currently Enter new System Description gt Type the new system name and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 Configuring the System Location Type L to configure the system location up to 39 alphanumeric characters 1 The IAD displays the current system location and prompt System Location is currently Enter new System Location gt Type the name of the new server location and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Configuring the System Community The value that you set must match the write community name of the SNMP host to enable the SNMP Set operation If you enable SNMP
136. any may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning No user serviceable parts are contained in this equipment This equipment may not be used for coin service provided by the Telephone Company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs Contact the state Public Utilities Commission or Corporation for information Do not attempt to repair this equipment yourself Industry Canada Notice NOTICE The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface xviii appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment m
137. ape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Configuring Loop Gain Setting by Port To set Transmit and Receive Loop Gain values by port follow these steps 1 Type 3 to select Configure Loop Gain setting per port The IAD displays a prompt for the line to configure Select Line 1 8 Type the line number and press Enter The IAD displays this prompt for the transmit loop Enter Transmit Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 34B 2dB Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter The IAD displays this prompt for the receive loop Enter Receive Loop Gain for all ports range 9dB 3dB 4dB 5 Type the value include a dash for negative values and press Enter The IAD saves the loop gain values and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue voice path configuration Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration Setting Country Mode pany Ty 150 The country mode selection menu allows you to select a national parameter list file for specified countries or regions Each file contains definitions of call progress tones normal and distinctive ring cadences ringer frequency hook flash timings and SLIC settings NOTE The country mode option is only available on IADs with POTS ports This o
138. ation 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Displaying Start Mode 1 To display a list of telephone ports and their current start mode type 3 2 The IAD displays a list similar to this Porto 1 Mode Loop Start Port 2 Mode Loop Start Port 3 Mode Loop Start Port 4 Mode Loop Start 3 Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu 4 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 144 Setting SLIC Control Mode int Configuring Start Mode on an Individual Port 1 Type 4 on the Start Mode Selection menu to select Configure Individual Port 2 For each port the IAD displays the following prompt Port 1 Loop 1 Lp 2 Grnd 3 DID Wnk 4 E amp M Wnk 5 Raw ABCD 0O or Enter NoChange 3 Type one of the following options for each port 1 Loop Start 2 Ground Start 3 DID Wnk 4 E amp M Wnk 5 RAW ABCD 0 or Enter no change 4 When you ve updated each port Press Enter a final time The IAD updates the settings and saves the configuration 6 Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration 7 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration al To set SLIC control mode for POTS only type T to display the SLIC Control Mode Selection menu Figure 7 5 SLIC Control Mode Selection Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
139. ation menu to select Configure DHCP Client If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC or DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to set The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to set and press Enter The IAD displays the status of the slot and port you re setting anda prompt DHCP Client for SDSL Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable DHCP Client on this port or D to disable it The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each remaining port to set Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Config uring DHCP Relay 117 DHCP Relay allows the IAD to forward DHCP requests from the LAN to a separate DHCP Server To configure the IAD for DHCP Relay type L on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the DHCP Relay menu which contains commands to configure DHCP R
140. aves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish Frame Relay configuration Setting the Fragment Size Manually 1 Type 3 to manually set fragment sizing The IAD displays the fragment size prompt Enter maximum fragment size in ms 0 50 or bytes 100 1600 0 Type the maximum fragment size and press Enter 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the FR FRF 12 Configuration menu Press Escape to continue 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish Frame Relay configuration CopperMountain Fragmentation Configuration NOTE With CMCP enabled the DSLAM controls fragmentation settings and IAD configuration is not required T If you selected Configure CopperMountain Fragmentation the IAD displays the CopperMountain FR FRF 12 Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 99 Figure 4 63 FRF 12 Configuration Menu for CopperMountain KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK HK FR FRF 12 Configuration 1 Enable Disable CuMtn Fragmentation 2 Set Real Time DLCI Type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling Coppermountain Fragmentation 1 2 3 Type 1 to enable or disable CopperMountain fragmentation The IAD displays the status and a prompt CuMtn Fragmentation is currently DISABLED Enter E to
141. ays the ATM Configuration menu where you may continue with other ATM tasks 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish ATM configuration Displaying F4 OAM Configuration To display the F4 OAM Type currently set type 4 The IAD displays the status message and then displays the ATM Configuration menu F4 End to end OAM VPI 0 Sending OAM Loopback To send an OAM Loopback 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 5 to select Send OAM Loopback 2 The IAD displays a list of all configured F4 OAM ports and VPI values Select Port 1 F5 OAM VCC 0 40 2 F5 OAM VCC 100 39 3 F4 OAM VPI 0 Type the port on which to send the OAM Loopback and press Enter 3 The IAD performs a loopback test on the selected port and reports the successful results Loopback on 0 38 response received in 5ms or unsuccessful results Loopback on 0 40 timeout error NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 4 Press any key to display the ATM Configuration menu Configuring EmptyCells 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 6 to select Configure EmptyCells 2 The IAD displays the following instructions Enter 1 for Empty Cells are currently IDLE DLE m 92 cells or 2 for UNASSIGNED cells Type 1 to select Idle cells or type 2 to select Unassigned cells 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish ATM configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 93 Configuring To configure Frame
142. bit Initialization minimal startup kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkkkxxkxx Verilink lt gt NE6200 8NetEngine IAD v3 5 0 lt gt Nov 19 2002 15333252 C 1998 2002 by Verilink Inc KKK K KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK You can also display the current configuration page 203 to validate the firmware version NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Setting up Your LAN Connection T 35 The IAD LAN port may be set for full duplex Ethernet operation if your IAD is set up as a router Full duplex mode allows simultaneous transmission and receipt of Ethernet packets On the Main menu type 6 Configure LAN to display the LAN Configuration menu Figure 3 5 LAN Configuration Menu kkkxkxkxkxkx xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxxkxxk kxx k LAN Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK a a aa a a a a KK KKK 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex Auto Negotiate the Speed Full Duplex Auto Negotiate the Speed Half Duplex Auto Negotiate Speed amp Full Half Duplex Mode Display M amp FEC Registers AYNHDOKRWNE Selecting the Connection If more than one connection is defined the IAD prompts you to specify the port number Type the number of the port select enable or disable and press Enter Establis
143. blinks while the IAD synchronizes with the voice gateway and lights continuously when the link is established 2 Connect a POTS telephone to a provisioned line port on the IAD 3 Lift the telephone receiver and check for dial tone If no dial tone is present troubleshoot as necessary 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each provisioned line port 5 Disconnect the telephone once you are through testing the line ports 6 Use acrossover cable to connect the PC to the Ethernet LAN port on the IAD Determine that the PC is configured with an IP address on the same subnet as the IAD 7 Observe that the LINK indicator on the IAD front panel lights to verify that the IAD is connected to the LAN 8 Run Ping on the PC to ping a known good address on the IAD and verify the acknowledgement If a timeout occurs troubleshoot the LAN path to the IAD 9 Ping a known good address on the network and wait for acknowledgement If a timeout occurs troubleshoot the LAN path to the IAD 10 Disconnect the Ethernet cable between the PC and the IAD NetEngine IAD User Guide Verification Mainten ance Displaying the Current Configur ation 273 11 Using a straight through cable connect the Ethernet LAN port on the IAD to your local LAN patch panel or hub switch router 12 Connect the IAD telephone ports to the local distribution frame or patch panel The IAD is ready for service The IAD menu interface contains utilities rese
144. cations on page 279 lists the specifications for each IAD Appendix D Connector Pinouts on page 289 provides interface pinout information for each type of port on the 6000 and 7000 family of IADs You should read and understand the following precautions and warnings before using the NetEngine IAD You should post these precautions in a clearly visible location near each IAD The Safety status of the SLIC ports on this product are defined as TNV 2 Therefore cables attached to them should not be subject to over voltage To ensure this they should not leave the building in which the Unit is installed Close supervision is necessary when the system is used by or near children Do not leave unattended while in use Only use electrical extension cords with a current rating equal to that of the system Always disconnect the system from power before cleaning and servicing and when not in use NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface Product Warranty Contacting Verilink Repair and Warranty Information Conventions pan pane g XV Do not spray liquids directly onto the system when cleaning Always apply the liquid first to a static free cloth Do not immerse the system in any liquid or place any liquids on it Do not disassemble this system except as instructed in the manufacturer s instructions To reduce the risk of shock and to maintain the warranty on the system a qualified technician must perform ser
145. cened 94 Deleting a EN cise acess secs shecnetencamcatgine tatendetmucudtavceswstag 96 Displaying Current DONS sacintscctccinesincinteichsttereeieeiae 96 Configuring Frame Relay Options eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 97 Quick Configuration xasicctachctrricerianesininnchieiauecmaisaaeeGsanabidenen 102 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Basic Router Setup Tasks cceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 104 Router Configuration Menu ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 105 Configuring a Port IP Address isccisccissiicctsiteasanaanainnteanmennnte 106 Unconfiguring a Port IP Address eceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 108 Setting the Port Maximum Transmission Unit 20 109 Enabling and Disabling RIP ccceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 Enabling and Disabling RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port 110 Setting the RIP Version a eesicccccecnedtntecnstencteeiteteatctcemetae 111 Managing Static and Default Routes cceeeeeeee 112 Setting the Default Route 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 V NetEngine IAD User Guide Configuring DNS Client seein ecssetceeestee evar eee vereveree tuidayecttandetayd 114 Configuring DACP CHEM cicieencicetisusteteverieebiceliesiestatiediaeide 116 Configuring DACP Relay ces nsccicdeteiecasccevac saaasccniebeadienetnnenials 117 Configuring the Telnet Server Port eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 Configuring IP Filtering s c
146. contain up to 17 alphanumeric characters These values are case sensitive soaces and punctuation characters are not allowed NOTE The IAD can only store one user ID and password at each security level T Changing a Password To change a password at any security level you must sign on at or above the security level you re changing and follow these steps 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu Figure 3 1 Password Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKK KK KKK Password Configuration Menu KKEKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK Change User ID Change User Password Change NetMan Password Change Supervisor Password Change Primary RADIUS Server Address Change Primary RADIUS Encryption Secret Change Secondary RADIUS Server Address Change Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret Display RADIUS Configuration OMOANADUOBWNE 2 Type 2 3 or 4 to change the password for the selected level 3 Enter the password for the current level 4 Enter the new password after the prompt or press Enter to enter a null password 5 Enter the new password or Enter again to confirm the change The IAD immediately updates the password The next time you log in at that level the new password will be in effect NOTE You cannot use the Escape key to exit the password update command To exit deliberately enter an incorrect password a
147. cs for a specific protocol type the option The IAD immediately resets all statistics for the specified protocol and displays the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Route Table Report ARP Table Report Bridge Forwarding Database Report 238 Continue resetting network statistics or press Escape to return to the Network Statistics menu Type R to display the Route Table report in the Reports menu The IAD lists each route by IP address and displays the following information about statically configured routes and dynamically learned ones Table 12 26 Route Table Report Parameter Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric Type Description destination address IP subnet mask no of bits reserved for the host IP address of packets sent to destination IP address of outgoing interface no of hops routers required to reach the specified gateway static dynamic RIP local Address Resolution Protocol ARP obtains the Ethernet MAC address for a known IP address Type A on the Reports menu to display the following information about mappings between Ethernet Media Access Control MAC addresses hardware addresses and IP addresses Table 12 27 ARP Table Report Parameter IP Address Ethernet Address Interface Description IP address that corresponds to the MAC address Ethernet address of the device assigned by the manufacturer The i
148. ction srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 25 5 TCP OH 0 65535 92 100 1 1 295 255 255 255 0 When you re done viewing the details press any key to return to the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu Table 5 2 Filter Details Parameter Description num number of the filter state Idle or Active action Pass or Discard srcLwP Filter Source Port Low TCP or UDP packets only srcHiP Filter Source Port High TCP or UDP packets only source ip addr low Filter Destination IP Low Address source ip addr high Filter Source IP High Address proto Filter protocol IP ICMP IGMP TCP UDP NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 124 Table 5 2 Filter Details Parameter Description mask ICMP or TCP only dstLwP Filter Destination Port Low dstHiP Filter Destination Port High dest ip addr low Filter Destination IP Low Address dest ip addr high Filter Destination IP High Address Editing a Filter in the Buffer To edit a filter currently stored in the buffer follow these steps 1 On the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu type E to edit the filter 2 Follow the IAD messages to enter values page 122 3 When you enter the last parameter the IAD displays the summary information and saves the configuration The IAD displays the IP Filter Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press E
149. cuit Identifier VPI Type a VCI value between 32 and 65535 default is 38 for data 39 for voice and press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 82 4 The IAD displays the ATM Encapsulation Configuration menu Figure 4 37 ATM Encapsulation Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKKKK KKK ATM Encapsulation Configuration KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK Current Encapsulation NONE AAL5 None AALO None Proprietary Voice RFC 1483 using VC Muxing RFC 1483 with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoOATM with LLC Encapsulation RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing YHA OBWNE Type the option for the encapsulation to configure for this PVC NOTES RFC 1483 using VC Muxing supports routing or bridging If you select RFC 2364 PPPoATM with LLC Encapsulation or RFC 2364 PPPoATM using VC Muxing follow the on screen messages to set the PPP authorization type When complete continue with step 7 mm 5 The IAD displays the ATM Service Category Configuration menu Figure 4 38 ATM Service Category Configuration Menu KAKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK ATM Service Category Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK 1 CBR 2 UBR Type 1 to select CBR for high priority data Type 2 to select UBR for low priority data 6 The IAD displays the ATM PCR Configuration menu Figure 4 39 ATM
150. d 39 for voice 1483 2364 Encapsulation keyword slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description Enables and disables bridging on a WAN port set wan bridge lt on off gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off bridging on the specified port slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 255 set wan datalink set wan framerelay Description Sets the datalink protocol to Frame Relay or ATM If you don t enter optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface and port set wan datalink lt framerelay atm gt slot interface port framerelay atm Keyword identifying datalink protocol slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description Sets the Frame Relay DLCI number and encapsulation type to RFC1490 or RFC1483 If you do not enter any optional parameters it finds the first available slot interface and port set wan framerelay dlci lt dlci number gt lt 1490 1483 gt slot interface port dici number DLCI value 16 1023 default is 32 for data and 33 for voice 1490 1483 Encapsulation keyword slot Slot number 1 to 7
151. d Causes Symptom Cannot receive or send data If IAD is configured as router If the IAD is configured as a bridge Probable Cause Incorrect PVC DLCI set for data channel Incorrect network setup Incorrect or missing LAN or WAN IP address Incorrect or missing default static route Incompatible RIPv1 incorrect bridging parameters Incorrect connection Missing peer or converter Corrective Action Verify these settings VPI 0 to 255 VCI 0 to 65535 DLCI 16 to 1023 default PVC 0 38 DLCI 32 View Interface page 215 and Media statistics page 226 to check the pack receive and send status Check and correct network setup as necessary Ensure that both the LAN and WAN IP addresses are configured Review the routing table and correct as necessary page 238 Check and correct subnet masks 255 255 255 0 Update RIPv1 to RIPv2 Review IAD configuration page 203 and current bridge status page 239 Correct as necessary Ensure that the IAD is connected to another bridge Install a converter to convert 1483 cells to Ethernet packets NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 269 The table following lists the IAD provisioning parameters on the voice gateway that identifies the IAD and affects its performance Verify these parameters when troubleshooting the IAD Table 14 2 IAD Provisioning Parameters Parameter ID Serial Number Profil
152. data segments with only an ACK segments with a delayed ACK segments with a RST window probes window updates active opens passive opens connections currently established connections gracefully closed connections aborted failed connection attempts Description No of segments received with the RST Reset Flag bit on in the TCP header Not used Not used Total TCP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Destination port field value in TCP header is illegal Total segments sent No of retransmitted TCP data packet Not used Not used No of unsolicited reset RST segment sent Not used Not used No of TCP connections opened No of TCP passive connections opened No of TCP connections currently established No of TCP connections gracefully closed Not used Not used UDP Statistics Report To display the UDP Statistics report type U on the Network Statistics menu The UDP Statistics report displays detailed information about UDP User Datagram Protocol packets sent and received Table 12 7 UDP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources Total UDP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resource kernel memory packet buffers etc NetEng
153. debugging the IAD displays specific Derived Timing debug messages NOTE The Derived Timing debugging messages are reserved for use by Verilink network engineers To enable or disable Derived Timing debugging follow these steps 1 Type 2 on the Derived Timing menu The IAD displays the Derived Timing Debug menu KR KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKK Derived Timing Debug KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KK KKK KKK Derived Timing debug not enabled 1 Enable Disable ALL Derived Timing Debug Messages 2 Enable Disable PSTN ONLY Derived Timing Debug Messages 3 Enable Disable Local Clock ONLY Derived Timing Debug Messages NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Verifying an IP Address 49 2 Type 1 2 or 3 to enable or disable specific derived timing debugging messages For each option the IAD displays the Derived Timing Debug menu 2 Type 1 to enable debug messages or 2 to disable debug messages 3 Reset the IAD page 15 When operating the IAD in a network there are several different IP addresses you should be aware of One for a computer running Windows One or more for the IAD Verifying an IP Address for Windows Systems To verify the IP address of your computer 1 Click the Start button click Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panels window double click the Network icon and then click the Configuration tab 3 In
154. ded transmitted packets due to other reasons reasons such as lack of packet buffer Packets Received by Type octects rcvd Total octets bytes received from interface unicast rcvd No of Unicast Packets received from interface multicast revd No of Multicast Packets received from interface broadcast rcvd No of Broadcast Packets received from interface Packets Sent by Type octects sent Total octets bytes sent from interface unicast sent No of Unicast Packets sent from interface multicast sent No of Multicast Packets sent from interface broadcast sent No of Broadcast Packets sent from interface NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 218 Bridge Statistics Report To display the Bridge Statistics report type B on the Interface Statistics menu This report provides details about all packets sent and received on the IAD bridge Table 12 10 Bridge Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information bridge packets received bridge octects received discarded for lack of resources bridge packets received and discarded bridge packets sent to one other port bridge packets sent to all other ports Sent Packet Information bridge packets sent bridge octects sent discarded for lack of resources Packets Received by Type spanning tree config packets received spanning tree topology change packets received spanning tree invalid packets received spanning tree config packets sen
155. defined for this interface Discarded frames because a collision occurred during frame reception No of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet Discarded received packets due to the internal Received Packet Ring Pool are full therefore no incoming packets could be processed Total Ethernet packets sent Discarded outgoing packets due to internal Transmitted Packet Ring Pool Buffers are full Could not process any outgoing packets Length of outgoing packets is larger than the maximum length of this interface No of discarded transmitted packets due to No of transmitting Heartbeat signal quality error packets lost errors A count of frames for which the first transmission attempts on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions Discarded transmitted frames because a collision occurred No of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collision NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 234 Table 12 22 Ethernet Statistics Report Parameter carrier sense lost underrun transmitter resets Description No of times that the carrier sense con
156. der Normally u Law is used in North America and a Law is used in Europe To set On hook Transmission mode POTS only for groundstart lines type o to display the Ground Start OHT Mode Selection menu Figure 7 7 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKKK KKK Ground Start OHT Mode Selection KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKKE KK KK KKK On Hook Transmission for a Ground Start Line is DISABLED ENABLE Ground Start On Hook Transmission O E O DISABLE Ground Start On Hook Transmission 1 Type E to enable onhook transmission mode or D to disable it 2 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 146 Setting Idle Voltage Mode To set idle high voltage for loop start lines POTS only type L to display the Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection menu Figure 7 8 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection Menu KKEKKKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection KKEKKKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KK 1 Enable Disable Loop Start Idle High Voltage for all ports 2 Display current Loop Start Idle High Voltage settings 3 Enable Disable Loop Start Idle H
157. displays this prompt Checking for additional DHCP Servers is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable checking or D to disable checking Proceed to Step 1 in the next section NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 174 Configur To configure DHCP Server parameters type 1 on the DHCP Server ing DHCP Configuration menu or continue from the previous section 1 The IAD displays the gateway address and prompt Server Current Gateway address 0 0 0 0 Parameters Enter new Gateway IP address Type the IP address of the gateway and press Enter If there is no gateway available type the address of the Ethernet port 2 The IAD displays the current DNS Server address and a prompt Current DNS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255 to use the DNS Server assigned from another port Enter new DNS Server IP address Type the new DNS Server address or type 255 255 255 255 touse a DNS Server assigned from another port Press Enter to continue 3 The IAD displays the current NetBIOS Server address and prompt Current NetBIOS Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NetBIOS Server IP address 4 Type the IP address of the new NetBIOS Server and press Enter 5 The IAD prompts you for the subnet mask Current Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Enter new Subnet Mask Type the new subnet mask and press Enter 6 The IAD displays the current domain name and prompt Current Domain name
158. dition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt DMA underrun Discarded outgoing packets because there are no packets waiting in the buffer No of transmitted packets after an error occurred NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 235 G7070 ADSL Statistics Report Table 12 23 G7070 ADSL Statistics Report Parameter Operational Seconds Downstream SNR Margin Downstream Attenuation Upstream Attenuation Near End FEC i Near End CRC i Near End SEF Near End LOS Far End FEC f Far End CRC f Far End SEF Far End LOS Near End CRC Last Near End CRC Last Failure Counters Overall Local SEF Local LOS Remote SEF Remote LOS ADSL Standard Description Total kernel time link went operational in Seconds Current rate of the Downstream SNR Signal to Noise Ration Margin Current rate of the Downstream Attenuation Current rate of the Upstream Attenuation Count of the Near End FEC Forward Error Correction Count of Near End Interleaved symbols with CRC errors Count of Near End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Near End of LOS Loss of Signal Frames Count of Far End FEC Forward Error Correction Count of Far End Interleaved symbols with CRC e
159. dress in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the DNS server IP address set dns server address lt IP address gt IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets the default IP address set ip default route lt IP address gt IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 Description Sets a static IP route set ip route lt IP Route gt lt netmask gt lt Gateway IP Address gt IP Route IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 Gateway IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 249 set lan bridge set lan ip address Description Enables or disables bridging on a LAN port set lan bridge lt on off gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off bridging on the specified port IP address IP address in octal format 999 999 999 999 netmask Subnet mask in octal format 255 255 255 255 slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ETHERNET ADSL XDSL SDSL port Port number 1 to 8 Description Sets the LAN IP address If you do not enter any optional parameters the IAD sets the address on the first available slot interface port and connection If connection is omitted the first is used set lan ip address lt IPaddress gt lt netmask gt slot interface port
160. e including changing User security level user ID and any level passwords plus complete IAD configuration capability Network Administrator This user may perform tasks that alter the network settings of the IAD plus has access to all of the data networking configuration menus and can update routing and bridging information and status This user can change this level password and the User level user ID and password and has access to all display only menus This user may not modify WAN or LAN settings alter derived timing use command line interface or modify voicepath settings User This user has access to display only menus and may view the current configuration interface and media statistics routing and bridging information and status This user may change this level user ID and password This user may not make or save any changes to the configuration of the IAD To maintain IAD security a user with Supervisor privileges should modify the User security level user ID and passwords for both User level and Network Administrator level prior to placing the IAD into production NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 25 Table 3 2 lists the default values for the user IDs and passwords Table 3 2 Default User IDs and Passwords Security Level User ID Password User lt Enter gt lt Enter gt Network NetMan lt Enter gt Administrator Supervisor Supervisor supervisor The user ID and password may
161. e IAD identify the telephone cables and verify that WAN service is installed and configured by the service provider When you ve completed this section reset the IAD so it can synchronize these physical connections Ethernet LAN Connection The Ethernet LAN port on the rear of the IAD is an RJ45 jack for 10 100Base T Ethernet cables If the IAD is intended to act as an Internet gateway for the LAN in the customer s premises connect the IAD to the switch hub or router using an Ethernet straight through cable NOTE To temporarily connect the IAD directly to a PC for Telnet configuration without going through a hub or router be sure to use an Ethernet cross over cable customer supplied WAN Connections WAN connections vary based on the WAN interface on your IAD Identify the WAN interface on your IAD and proceed to the appropriate section NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide 21 Making GSHDSL Connections GSHDSL equipped IADs use an RJ11 connector on the rear panel for WAN connection To make the connection plug the WAN cable into the RJ11 WAN connector Table D 7 on page 290 lists the GSHDSL connector pinouts Making SDSL or ADSL Connections SDSL and ADSL equipped IADs use an RJ45 connector on the rear panel for WAN connection To make the connection plug the xDSL cable into the RJ45 WAN connector Table D 6 on page 290 lists the RU45 WAN pinouts Making T1 E1 Connections T1 E1 equipped IAD
162. e TCP UDP Sequence Ack State Retrys local foreign Bad checksum local foreign Description IP address of the foreign device IP address of the local LAN device Port number assigned by NAT which is translated by NAT to from the local port Port number of the local LAN device zero if ICMP protocol Port number of the foreign device zero if ICMP protocol Packets sent from the local device to the foreign device packets sent from the foreign device to the local device TCP or UDP Idle time in seconds for the connection TCP sequence number TCP ack number TCP state number TCP only local TCP retransmissions from local device to foreign device foreign TCP retransmissions from foreign device to local device local packets with bad TCP checksums from local device foreign packets with bad TCP checksums from foreign device NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration NAT Local Server Table NAT Alias Table Deleting IP Addresses from NAT Tables 199 When NAT is enabled you can display the entries in the local server table To display the table type o on the NAT Configuration menu Entry Local IP Address Local Port Internet Port Protocol 1 115 63320 2 3 TCP Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 5 NAT Local Server Table Report Report Entry Description Entry Table entry number Local IP Address IP address in use Local Port local port number
163. e 15 when after configuring the IAD as a DHCP Server Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 173 Using DHCP Debugging Messages Enabling and Disabling DHCP Server Enabling and Disabling Checking for Additional DHCP Servers The commands in option B Enable Disable DHCP Debug Messages are reserved for use by Verilink network engineers When you enable DHCP Server the IAD sequentially displays and processes the required configuration commands beginning with Enable DHCP Server To enable or disable DHCP Server follow these steps 1 Type E to select Enable Disable DHCP 2 If DHCP Relay is enabled the IAD displays this prompt DHCP Server and DHCP Relay cannot both be enabled Do you wish to disable DHCP Relay N Type Y to disable DHCP Relay and enable DHCP Server and proceed to step 4 3 If DHCP Relay is not enabled the IAD displays this prompt DHCP Server is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable DHCP Server to type D to disable DHCP Server Proceed to Step 1 in the next section When the IAD boots the internal DHCP server may be configured to check for additional DHCP servers on the LAN and disable AD based DHCP service To enable or disable checking for external DHCP servers 1 Type D to select Enable Disable Checking for Additional DHCP Servers 2 The IAD
164. e 277 Appendix C NetEngine IAD Specifications 6000 Family resect tte ce eter cernaz oveet aadachecots enter ct teeem ceeetoecete 279 BOO F esas cose E 286 Appendix D Connector Pinouts Connector PinOuts cccceceeeeecceeeceeeceecaeeececceecanecaeeeeeeeaes 289 Appendix E Glossary Octo GY A a eRe ene eo een nee eae 293 Index 1 5 5 atthe ene aera Der A 297 xi NetEngine IAD User Guide Audience Contents Preface The Verilink NetEngine Family IAD User Guide contains the information you need to install connect and configure each Verilink NetEngine IAD in a customer s premises This guide is intended for network engineers and other professionals in the telecommunications industry who are engaged in the installation configuration management and support of telephone and computer networks network access products and related equipment The guide contains the following chapters and appendixes This preface describes the audience how this guide is organized safeguards you should always observe how to contact Verilink for support and other business and warranty and regulatory notices Chapter 1 Introduction on page 1 introduces the features of each IAD in the NetEngine IAD 6000 and 7000 families including the hardware indicators and ports Chapter 2 Quick Start Guide on page 9 describes the process of getting an IAD up and running in a typical customer premises This chapter is
165. e IAD and data communications equipment DCE DCE ACT Illuminates or blinks when there is activity on the DCE link Rear Panel Connectors On the rear panel the IAD contains several connectors The WAN connectors vary by AD both are present but one has a permanently attached metal shield to prevent use Figure 1 5 7000 Family IAD Back Panel Universal Serial Interface DB 25 On Off Ethernet Switch RJ 45 Jack AC Power WAN Console Line Telephone Lines Input Modules DB 9 RJ 21X Jack RJ 45 or RJ 48C Jack NetEngine IAD User Guide Introduction AC Power Connects the IAD to an AC outlet of 108 130 volts via an AC power cord 10 100Base T Ethernet Port Connects the IAD to the local area network using a CAT 5 straight through Ethernet cable or directly to a PC for accessing via Telnet using a cross over cable customer supplied WAN Interfaces Depending on the IAD WAN interfaces include the following T1 E1 uses an RJ48 connector for the connection SDSL uses an RJ45 connector for the connection Universal Serial Interface USI Port The USI port is configurable for RS 530 or V 35 When configured as an RS 530 port you may use a straight through DB25 serial cable for connection to your leased line DSU CSU equipment When configured for use as V 35 Black Box Corporation provides a cable FA058 for conversion purposes To convert from RS 53
166. e IAD displays the DHCP Client debug status DHCP Client Debug Mode is currently DISABLED 2 Type E to enable DHCP Client debugging or type D to disable it The IAD sets DHCP Client debug mode to the setting you entered and displays the Debug menu Displaying Error Dumps This option displays the most recent error encountered during the active session This option is for factory use only NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Performing File Transfers The File Transfer menu allows you to transfer groups of files to or from the IAD To display the File Transfer menu type x on the Utilities menu Figure 3 10 File Transfer Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK File Transfer Menu KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Load Boot ROM Update ACOS acos bin Update Entire System File Transfer Utilities TFTP Server Menu Hex Oo wW To perform a specific task type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Loading a Boot ROM File Type B to download the Boot ROM to the file system on the IAD Figure 3 11 File Transfer Method Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KK KKKKKKKKKKK File Transfer Method KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKK 1 Receive via TFTP 2 Receive via XMODEM 1 Type 1 to use TFTP or 2 to use XMODEM to transfer the file to the
167. e Mode 1 Type 3 to display the G SHDSL Rate Mode menu Figure 4 12 Configure CPE CO Mode Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK Configure G SHDSL Rate Mode KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KKK Current Rate Mode 1 Fixed 2 Adaptive FIXED Type 1 to select Fixed or type 2 to select Adaptive 2 The IAD sets the rate mode and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu Selecting the Line Rate 1 Type 4 to display the current line rate and a prompt Line Rate is currently 88 Kbps Enter xDSL Line Rate Type a line rate value between 64 Kbps and 2320 Kbps which must be a value evenly divisible by 8 2 The IAD sets the rate and displays the xDSL Configuration Menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish WAN configuration Enabling and Disabling xDSL Debug Messages NOTE m Option D Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages is reserved for Verilink network engineers NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configur ing the SDSL Interface 6500 63 The tasks described in this section all begin on the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu The tasks are described so you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the SDSL interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the
168. e Name Interface Group ATM Protection Group VPI vcl Transport Signalling Compression Echo Cancellation Admin Operational Description Identification number of the IAD read only IAD serial number read only Same as MAC Address IAD profile name Identifies the Interface Group that will deliver the subscriber s calls ATM Protection Group to which the IAD is assigned Virtual Path Identifier that identifies the subscriber specific logical path between the voice gateway and the ATM network Virtual Circuit Identifier that identifies the subscriber specific virtual circuit between the voice gateway and the ATM network VCI must be specific between 32 and 1023 ATM or Frame Relay Loop Start or Ground Start No compression 32k or 16k On or off Service state of IAD locked or unlocked State of IAD read only NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 270 NetEngine IAD User Guide 15 Verification This chapter describes how to verify that the NetEngine IAD operates properly after installation It also covers maintenance and how to display the current configuration Before you can test the voice capabilities of the NetEngine IAD you must first provision it at the voice gateway This chapter contains the following topics Conducting a power up test page 272 Conducting an operational test page 272 Performing routine maintenance page 273 Displaying the cur
169. e Space in the File System To display the amount of free space in the file system flash memory type S on the File System menu The IAD displays the free space Free disk space 338432 bytes NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Using the 43 The Debug menu contains commands to set various debugging options Debugging should only be enabled specifically during a debugging or monitoring session and disabled when the session is complete Enabling multiple debugging options simultaneously slows IAD performance NOTE Debugging commands are reserved for use by Verilink network engineers Debugging options may be enabled and disabled without resetting the IAD To display the Debug menu type G on the Utilities menu Figure 3 9 Debug Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KR KKK KR KKK KK KK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKK Debug Menu KKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK K KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKK Set Ethernet MAC E Enable Disable PPP debug mode S Enable Disable STP debug mode I Enable Disable DHCP Client debug mode Q Display Error Dump To perform a task type the option and proceed to the appropriate section following Setting the Ethernet MAC Address To modify the Ethernet MAC address perform these steps 1 Type Mon the Debug menu The IAD displays the following message This will change the factory setting for the ENET Mac Address Are you sure 2 Type Y to proceed or any other character t
170. e following information Source Group 230 253 84 168 Expires 130s Incoming interface Null RPF Neighbor 0 0 0 0 Outgoing interface list SDSL VPI VCI 0 38 10 100BaseT Ethernet Source Group 237 152 172 93 Expires 42s Incoming interface Null RPF Neighbor 0 0 0 0 Outgoing interface list SDSL VPI VCI 0 38 NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration Displaying the PIM Neighbor 187 Table 10 1 Multicast Routing Table Fields Field Source Group State Expires Static Mroute Incoming interface RPF Neighbor Outgoing Interfaces Pruned Description IP address of the sender source IP address of the multicast group Class D IP address Pruned or Expired Pruned means that the state sent a Prune message to the upstream neighbor asking them to stop sending Multicast Group messages to this interface Expired means expiration time for the Prune state Expiration timer for the multicast routing state The source is a user assigned Multicast Routing Source Incoming interface for the multicast packet IP address of the upstream PIM neighbor List of the outgoing interfaces to which the multicast packet will forward If an outgoing interface is Pruned this means that the interface received a PIM Prune message Since Multicast packets are forwarded according to the preceding information this table is the key for IP Multicasting
171. e for connecting to a Nokia DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Setting Auto Sense Coppermountain DSLAM Type 3 to set the SDSL speed to Auto Sense for connecting to a Coppermountain DSLAM The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu Enabling Autobaud Mode Conexant DSLAM 1 Type 4 to enable or disable Conexant Autobaud mode 2 The IAD Displays the current setting and a prompt Conexant AutoBaud Mode is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable Autobaud mode and Sync Delay 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the SDSL Configuration menu When you enable Autobaud mode you automatically enable Sync Delay Conversely disabling Autobaud mode automatically disables Sync Delay Setting Sync Delay Lucent DSLAM 1 Type 5 to enable or disable Sync Delay which is paired with Conexant Autobaud mode 2 The IAD Displays the current setting and a prompt SDSL Sync Delay Disabled Conexant AutoBaud Mode is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable or D to disable Sync Delay and Autobaud mode If you disable Sync Delay you must set the SDSL data rate manually 3 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter SDSL Data Rate kbps Enter the rate 144 to 2320 kbps evenly divisible by 8 and press Enter 4 The IAD saves the configuration and
172. e terms datagram frame message and segment describe logical information groupings at various layers of the OSI reference model and in various technology circles PPP Point to Point Protocol a successor to SLIP that provides router to router and host to network connections over synchronous and asynchronous circuits Poisoned Reverse RIP Feature to set routes learned on the same port as the transmitted RIP message an infinite distance Prevents the propagation of routes from crashed routers through the network PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit PVCs save bandwidth associated with circuit establishment and tear down in situations where certain virtual circuits must exist all the time RFC Request for Comments Documents that detail operation of the Internet To obtain these document go to www rfc editor org RIP Routing Information Protocol Internet protocol used to exchange routing information within a system RIP uses hop count as a routing metric NetEngine IAD User Guide Glossary 296 Router Network layer device that uses one or more metrics to determine the optimal path to forward network traffic Routers forward packets from one network to another based on network layer information a router may connect networks using various protocols by encapsulating data within another network s packet format or by removing layers of packet formatting SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Network management protocol used in TCP
173. eaieisn ace leaits 255 set WAN ip ACAIESS cccsseseseeeeessseessnneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 256 set wan stp bridge are ccres ches teeciaevsgeieeseegeaveseunceg cael etiageteea 256 TAATOA ete Adee ens a ar ae ee eet reas ts eae 257 SHOW CONMOUPAMOM 2th cin ceeds e ar ets ars rede es Aad stn 257 show dhcp server Configuration cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 257 SHOW IP TOUleS eae onal ann aia ae 257 tiO rece Enen a ae einen tail eae feel aries ere a eee ede 257 X NetEngine IAD User Guide Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Using the Diagnostics MeNnu ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 260 POTS Diagnostics ass iccicniacecttennhtetccmndeepanusunncrdmnnddntacconentandven 260 SDSL DIAGNOSES wisacctecesensetsouccoycs ait Pau etiee aaa 265 ISDN BRI Diagnostics jessecisnsestecceaitentectelanetdsaadadiasdiusetanens 266 Troubleshooting the IAD ceeeccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 267 Chapter 15 Verification Power p Stacie E E E 272 Operational Test iisssccccsecceassencctenssensecciensseessnccconeeentanssesncntees 272 Maintenance a eccecep este serseaseetsten os ec tenepceeetuaneuaeneteeucnseastoamenns 273 Displaying the Current Configuration cceececeeeeeeee 273 Appendix A Menu Map Menu NAO esc faeces aca culdcGerepsasten exten se cteecsteceeeuedasetivtecetagite 275 Appendix B Country Codes Country Codes Tables ciachinctecsaieinanalaviasitablinchebignd tierc
174. eam Voice Gateway type E to display Call the Call Control Settings menu for JetStream Control Figure 7 18 Call Control Menu for JetStream Voice Gateway Settings KEKKKKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KK KK KKK Call Control Settings KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KKK KK A Stats Display R Ring Test S Display IAD state T Trace V Pick sound heard if insufficient WAN B W to complete call Z Zero Stats Display Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying Statistics Type A to display the JetStream Voice Gateway statistics report WAN RX PKTS WAN RX BYTES WAN TX PKTS WAN TX BYTES WAN TX DROPPED POTS RX PKTS POTS RX BYTES POTS TX PKTS POTS TX BYTES POTS TX DROPPED L2 RX PKTS L2 RX BYTES L2 TX PKTS L2 TX BYTES AAL2 HEC ERROR Performing a Ring Test NOTE This command is reserved for use by Verilink network engineers only T Type R to set up and run a ring test The IAD displays the Ring Test menu Figure 7 19 Ring Test Menu for JetStream Voice Gateway xx Ring Test settings Configure Ring Test Display Parameters Start Ring Test Stop Ring Test HUGO Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 159 Configuring the Ring Test Type c to configure the ring test
175. eartbeat Framer Sync Lost Tick Description Current version of the Remote HDSL2 Current Remote Country Code Current Provider Code Remote vendor provided data the low 4 bytes Remote vendor provided data the high 4 bytes Total Data Mode Heartbeat received Handle Modem Data state No of time that framer synchronization was lost NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 233 Ethernet Statistics Report Table 12 22 Ethernet Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets rcvd discarded RX ring empty discarded unrecognized protocol discarded RX error alignment errors bad fcs runt giant late collision overrun Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded TX ring full discarded bad pkt discarded TX error heartbeat lost deferred late collision excessive collision Total Ethernet packets received Discarded received packets because the internal Received Packet Ring Pool Buffers are empty therefore no incoming packets could be processed Protocol Type field value in Ethernet header does not correspond to IP No of discarded received packets due to the following reasons Frames containing a no of bits not divisible by eight is received and discarded Received frame contains CRC errors in the header Received frame is smaller than the minimum defined for this interface Received frame lengths are greater than maximum
176. eceived received Compressed RTP packets No of compressed RTP packets received received FULL_HEADER packets No of FULL_HEADER packets received received CONTEXT_STATE No of CONTEXT_STATE packets received packets Received Incorrect Sequence Numbers by Packet Type TCP packets with wrong No of compressed TCP packets received with bad sequence number sequence number UDP packets with wrong No of compressed UDP packets received with bad sequence number sequence number RTP packets with wrong No of compressed RTP packets received with bad sequence number Sequence Number Average Header Sizes Ave sent TCP header The average size of the TCP header sent Ave sent UDP header The average size of the UDP header sent Ave sent RTP header The average size of the TCP header sent Ave received TCP header The average size of the TCP header received Ave received UDP header The average size of the UDP header received Ave received RTP header The average size of the RTP header received NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports P 225 PPP Statistics Report This report is available when ATM PVC Encapsulation Type RFC 2364 is selected Table 12 17 PPP Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for various reasons LCP rejects echoes replies discards Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded link not open LCP rejects
177. ecting devices over a limited geographic area usually limited to an office or office complex Often connected to the Internet via IADs with firewall software to limit access to the LAN by authorized users May use TCP IP or one of several other protocols LMI Local Management Interface A set of the following enhancements to the basic Frame Relay specification Called LMT in ANSI terminology a keep alive mechanism that verifies that data is flowing a multi cast mechanism which provides the network server with its local DLCI and the multi cast DLCI Global addressing this gives DLCls global rather than local significance in Frame Relay networks amechanism that provides an on going status report on the DLCls known to the switch MAC Media Access Control Lower of the two sub layers of the data link layer defined by the IEEE MAC address Standardized data link layer address that is required for every port or device that connects to a LAN Other devices in the network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the network and to create and update routing tables and data structures MAC addresses are six bytes long and are IEEE controlled Also known as a hardware address a MAC layer address or a physical address MPEG Moving Pictures Expert Group Notified Entry IP address of the MGCP Call Agent controls the call setup and teardown for all call features under MGCP NetEngine IAD User Guide Glossary
178. ed packets due to internal errors sages Received No of IGMP Membership Query messages received No of IGMP Version 1 Membership Report messages received NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 209 Table 12 3 IGMP Statistics Report Parameter Ver 2 Membership Report received Leave group message received DVMRP routing message received PIM routing message received Traceroute response received Mcast traceroute messages received Other messages received Description No of IGMP Version 2 Membership report messages received No of IGMP Leave Group messages received No of IGMP DVMRP routing message messages received No of IGMP PIM routing messages received No of IGMP Traceroute resp messages received No of IGMP Multicast Traceroute messages received No of other IGMP type messages received Queries Reports and Messages Sent Membership Query sent Ver 1 Membership Report sent Ver 2 Membership Report sent Leave group message sent DVMRP routing message sent PIM routing message sent Traceroute resp sent Mcast traceroute messages sent Other messages sent No of IGMP Membership Query messages sent No of IGMP Version 1 Membership Report messages sent No of IGMP Version 2 Membership report messages sent No of IGMP Leave Group messages sent No of IGMP DVMRP routing message messages sent No of IGMP PIM routing messages sent No of
179. eeeeeeeees 240 Zero All Statistics sates accscncseintenue seiicean nacre seveenneees tan dnexd santvedeencte 241 Chapter 13 Command Line Interface Itro dUCHO N permet raeeetne mane ee ery ee een eee eee ernest 243 SXI eee eee ane een e re eer on err ere sy ere ere Meer err ere en rere rr ae 245 ON EE E E EE ansetiacden oti hed ET 245 GUI serene Gaeie eta haar Guusnbddadeuadadembunediaaneditcannuasganhendandiantiuaiste 245 PONISI rseindaisienticctriinaaty Gcetteupheaicncrdealentianborecteintetuauieatinants 245 POSE SYSTEM asiciavsvecsnntaesanericecericdstnawavaedvncevertevieararnentenielenshe 246 remove lan ip address s c 2eaauereniereiuueisedenielede 246 set bridge global sisccti ccacstacacernndvan ued senevielaiskanddnadelhceduaMetauucdass 246 set bridge stp global c cceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 247 set dhcp server enable ceceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 247 set dhcp server Qateway ecccscccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesenneeeeees 247 set dhcp server subnet sicc ciectihediecde ches cheedeten deeded 247 set dhcp server CNS apis desc eyees pa yedebede ete eer el eye 247 ix NetEngine IAD User Guide set dhcp server netbios 2s sacaisnctisn Gach ceruueds sacdanvuaned ncsgcesneesbbiies 247 set dhcp Server domain ssssseccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 Set dhcp Server ange ccs ce Area ee eas 248 set dns Server address 2 ecee scene eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee
180. eeeees 248 Set ip default route cceccccecessssssseseseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 Set IP 9 0 c Renaeeteney n aa a 248 set lan bridge Naeem eee en MOON Te We Ot Pn Conte Te On 249 SOF AN ID AGCIESS nirea a E EE EEE 249 s t lam TiD meiir aaa aea E EE EE EE AEA 250 set lan stp DIAG Seis a et ta hea tek Ne it ae 250 set mgcp bracketing i isccis ciasiorrustire di Veieeeslaads ilacaeessntenines 250 set mgep listening ports asec ec ad alied ees 251 set mgcp notified entity sccsssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 Set MYCP signaling CONNECTION seeeecceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 Set MGCP signaling POMt ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 251 set MOCH signaling 10S si snena tic isatoesleitaietatan aes tetaeett ennen 251 set MYCP VOICE CONNECTION cccceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesetteeeeaaeeees 252 SET MGCP VOICE TOS iets sani eiwvamcvadusussin Wen a aara ia e EEA 252 setale generar CRD RTE T tree eae rc RST Rene eevee we eee PE oe 252 set SOSRSD OCC Fas asthe ts i ee cette ie ee ed Soe a 253 set system defaults rts iccstvcstacedaxdivivednvetaccncciecs cen ncieedetewsetits 253 set wan atm ppp auth sevice cere aric evicate danni 253 set wan atM WC pose ces ee ie cadet decades be decede pee eae et eden 254 set wan bridge lt hrcsccccu te tec cereus che ee tec eect tities 254 set wan Catalink ci27 isthe ite uate ahitindad ethan eaei eit 255 set wan framerelay ccsicieecsectetien tcc e
181. ees 158 Configuring AAL2 LES CAS ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeteeee 161 Configuring AAL2 LES CCS ELCP cceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteees 165 Chapter 8 Firewall Configuration Creating a Firewall via IP Filtering ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 Chapter 9 DHCP Server Configuration Basic DHCP Server Setup Tasks ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 172 The DHCP Server Configuration Menu ceeeeee 172 Using DHCP Debugging Messages cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 Enabling and Disabling DHCP Servet cccceeeeeeeteees 173 Enabling and Disabling Checking for Additional DHCP ServetrS eecscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 Configuring DHCP Server Parameters eeeeeeeeeeees 174 Configuring the DHCP Address Range Pool ce 175 Configuring a DHCP Client Entry isiiccnctcecceiceeseserstexenevevaxercusene 175 Displaying DHCP Server Details eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 Displaying DHCP Server Statistics ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 178 vii NetEngine IAD User Guide Displaying DHCP Server Assigned and Unassigned Addresses cceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 178 Displaying DHCP Entry Details 00 0 0 ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 179 Deleting a DHCP Client Entty 00 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 179 Deleting a DHCP Assignment Entry cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 179 Chapter 10 Multicast Conf
182. efine PVCs Configure ATM options Define PVCs Configure ATM options Define DLCls Set maintenance protocol 0232 Yes Define DLCls Set maintenance protocol NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Figure 4 2 T1 E1 WAN Configuration Flowchart T1 E1 Interface Set datalink protocol Set physical interface Define PVCs Configure ATM options Define DLCls Set maintenance protocol NetEngine IAD User Guide 53 WAN Configuration 54 Identifying your WAN Interface and Datalink Protocol The sections you ll use to perform WAN configuration depend on the IAD model and the datalink protocol you choose Voice and data traffic are each carried in their own PVCs ATM protocol or DLCls Frame Relay protocol You may define up to 8 PVCs or DLCls for voice and data For a voice circuit a single PVC or DLCI can carry the voice traffic for all voice ports on the IAD Voicepath configuration is described in a separate chapter Voice Path Configuration on page 139 To proceed identify your IAD and datalink protocol in the tables following and perform the listed tasks 6100 4 ADSL with ATM e Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 56 Configure ADSL page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 g e ON 6200 8 T1 with Frame Relay ats Set the datalink protocol to Frame Relay page 56 Configure T1 page 72
183. egmentation Layer CRC failures since powerup 0 Configuring Trace Settings These commands are reserved for use by JetStream or Verilink network engineers Selecting Insufficient Bandwidth Sound Type v to select the type of dial tone heard by the telephone user if there is insufficient WAN bandwidth to complete a call The IAD displays the Insufficient Bandwidth Indication Setting menu and the current setting NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration Figure 7 20 Ring Test Menu for JetStream Voice Gateway KKKKK Insufficient Bandwidth Indication Setting Current sound setting Silence 0 Play Silence 1 Play Fast Beeping Type 0 to replace the dial tone with silence or type 1 to replace dial tone with a fast beeping sound Press Escape to return to the Call Control Setting menu and continue configu ration Resetting Statistics Type Z to reset the JetStream statistics The IAD resets the statistics to zero and displays the Call Control Setting menu NetEngine IAD User Guide 160 Voice Path Configuration 161 Configur ing AAL2 LES CAS ATM Adaptation Layer 2 Loop Emulation Services AAL2 LES is a broadband local loop emulation service specifically telephony that uses the ATM AAL2 adaptation layer When the voice gateway is specified as AAL2 LES CAS af vmoa 0145 type E on the Main menu to display the AAL2 LES Call Control menu Figure 7 21 AA
184. elay Figure 5 5 DHCP Relay Menu kkkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk kxx DHCP Relay Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK gt Enable Disable DHCP Relay C Configure DHCP Relay S Display DHCP Relay Statistics The tasks in this section originate at the DHCP Relay menu Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the corresponding section Enabling and Disabling DHCP Relay When you enable DHCP Relay you must provide a DHCP server IP address To enable or disable DHCP Relay follow these steps 1 On the DHCP Relay menu type E to select Enable Disable DHCP Relay 2 The IAD displays the current status and a prompt DHCP Relay is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable DHCP Relay on this port or D to disable it 3 The IAD displays the current DHCP server IP address and a prompt Current DHCP Server address 0 0 0 0 Enter new DHCP Server IP address Type the new DHCP Server IP address 4 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration Configuring the DHCP Server IP Address To set the DHCP server IP address 1 On the DHCP Relay menu type c to select Configure DHCP Relay 2 The IAD displays the current IP addre
185. endent Mu Iticast packets sent and received Table 12 5 PIM Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons unrecognized codes bad checksums packets smaller than header Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Total PIM packets received Discarded received packets due to resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to Packet header codes could not be recognized Bad packet header checksums Packet header size is bigger than packet buffer size Total PIM packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors Received Messages Information Hello received Register received Register Stop received Join Prune received Bootstrap received Assert received Graft received Graft Ack received Cand RP Adv received other messages received Sent Messages Informatio Hello sent Register sent Register Stop sent Join Prune sent No of PIM Hello messages received No of PIM Register messages received
186. ending channel to enable and press Enter 4 The IAD makes the change and saves the configuration and displays the E1 Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish E1 configuration Configuring the Transmit Clock Source 1 Type 8 to select Configure Transmit Clock Source and display the Select Tx Clock Source menu and status message Figure 4 35 Select Tx Clock Source menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Select Tx Clock Source KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Tx Clock is derived from Rx clock Slave Mode 1 External Slave Mode 2 Internal Master Mode Type 1 to select external or type 2 to select Internal mode 2 The IAD saves the configuration and resets the interface 3 Press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish E1 configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 80 Displaying Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log 1 Type P to display the physical layer statistics and the alarm log Error Count Rates Errors s Framing Bit Error Count Rate 4000 CRC Error Count Rate 0 Line Code Violation Count Rate 0 Far End Block Error Count Rate 1000 Rx Loss of Frame Count Rate 0 Change Of Frame Alignment Rate 0 Severely Errored Frame Rate 3 ALARM LOG Last 10 Items Current Time is 1 1 5 elapsed time alarm
187. enu T When DHCP is enabled it dynamically assigns an IP address to each device assigned to the DHCP server on the IAD You must identify the Ethernet Interface to correctly implement DHCP Server on your IAD You must complete at least these tasks to configure the DHCP server Enable DHCP default is disabled Configure the DHCP server parameters Configure the DHCP address range pool The DHCP Server commands are all displayed on the DHCP Server Configuration menu displayed by typing D on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are all described beginning at this menu Figure 9 1 DHCP Server Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK DHCP Server Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Enable Disable DHCP Enable Disable Checking Additional DHCP Servers Enable Disable DHCP Debug Messages Configure DHCP Server Parameters Configure DHCP Address Range Pool Configure DHCP Client Entry Display DHCP Configuration Display DHCP Server Statistics Display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses Display DHCP Server Unassigned Addresses Display DHCP Entry Details Delete A DHCP Client Entry Delete A DHCP Assignment Entry KxMUGPHNAQTHUA EA You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure the IAD for use as a DHCP Server Options that display in the DHCP Server Configuration menu are the same for both security levels NOTE Be sure to reset the IAD pag
188. eports Media Statistics Reports 226 Type M on the Reports menu to display Media statistics reports Media statistics reports display statistical information about the total packets handled Layer 2 on a per port basis Reports on physical connections vary based on the type of connection Reports include Ethernet USI GSHDSL ASDL SDSL ATM and Frame Relay To display specific media statistics select an interface to display the statistics as shown in these steps 1 The IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 T1 E1 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the interface 2 With the interface chosen the IAD displays the Media Statistics menu s NOTE The commands that display on the Network Statistics menu vary based on the WAN module and configuration of the IAD wi Figure 12 6 Media Statistics Menu Sample F Display Frame Relay Statistics S Display Serial Statistics C Clear a Statistic To display a specific report enter the option For detailed information about each report in the Media Statistics menu or to clear network statistics proceed to the appropriate section Frame Relay Statistics Report Table 12 2 following Universal Serial Interface Statistics Report Table 12 3 on page 208 ATM Statistics Report Table 12 4 on page 209 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Table 12 21 on page 231 Ethernet Statistics Report Table 1
189. eps a MAC address in the bridging table When the timer reaches zero the IAD deletes the address from the database updates the timer To set the bridge aging timer 1 Type a on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Bridge Aging Timer 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Bridge Aging time in seconds 1 3600 300 Type the aging time range 1 to 3600 seconds and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the timer Press any key to display the Bridge Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration Having many bridges creates the potential for network loops A loop presents conflicting information about the segment on which a specific address is located and forces the bridge to forward all data When configuring the IAD as a router Chapter 4 Router Configuration on page 103 you must disable STP both globally and by port NOTE When you enable STP the IAD reconfigures the bridge network to transfer data along an optimum route to its destination Enabling or Disabling STP Globally To enable or disable STP globally 1 On the Bridge Configuration menu type T to select Enable Disable Spanning Tree Globally The IAD displays the status of bridging and a prompt Spanning Tree is Globally DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable spanning tree globally
190. equiring a gateway connection on the WAN port To perform a hotline test 1 Type H on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Hotline Test 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Perform an all lines test Y or N Type Y to enable automatic line connection The IAD informs you the test has started Proceed to step 6 Type N to connect two specific ports 3 The IAD prompts you for the first port Type the port and press Enter 4 The IAD prompts for the second port Type the port and press Enter 5 The IAD informs you that the lines are connected and the test is started Lines 1 and 2 are connected together NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 262 Lines 3 and 4 are connected together Lines 5 and 6 are connected together Lines 7 and 8 are connected together Hotline test started 6 Press Escape to terminate the test The IAD terminates the test and displays the POTS Diagnostics menu Performing a Ring Test The ring test verifies that POTS device attached may be ringed by the IAD To perform a ring test 1 Type R on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Ring Test 2 The IAD displays this prompt Ring all lines YN or ESC Enter Y to proceed or N or Escape to abort and return to the menu THe IAD displays this prompt Ring lines concurrently or sequentially CS or ESC Enter c concurrent S sequential or Escape Listen for the rings to occur and press Escape to terminate the t
191. er the TOS byte value to use for RTP Voice packets 1 7 Type the field value and press Enter 9 The IAD saves the settings and displays the menu so you may continue configuring MGCP NCS 10 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Displaying MGCP Statistics Type s to display the endpoint line and connection statistics If no calls are active the IAD indicates if the Endpoint is currently connected to its Notified Entity or not If MGCP configuration is not correct the IAD displays this warning message Configuration Invalid initialization incomplete Debugging MGCP The commands displayed on the Debug MGCP menu are reserved for Verilink network engineers Removing a Connection Type R to remove a lost connection Type the number of the Connection ID to delete and press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration T 153 Port Administration Type A to display the Port Administration menu Figure 7 13 Port Administration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Port Administration Menu 1 Set Admin State for all ports 2 Display current Admin State 3 Configure Admin State per ports 4 Restart Endpoint NOTE These options are only available when you log in at the Network Administrator or Supervisor levels Setting Admin State Globally 1 2 3 4 5 Type 1 to enable
192. erfaces Port DLCI 1 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port The IAD displays the current setting and the prompt Enter Path Cost for Slot 1 Port 1 1 65535 32768 400 Type the path cost value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration Ethernet Encapsulation NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration 138 Deleting a To delete an Ethernet address from the bridge forwarding database follow Bridge these steps 1 Type D on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Delete Bridge Forwarding Forwarding Database Entry Database 2 The IAD displays the following instructions Entry Enter Ethernet address to delete from bridge databas koekkoek kt kukka 3 Type the MAC address of the Ethernet port and press Enter The IAD deletes the database entry and updates the configuration 5 Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide T 7 Voice Path Configuration After you have defined the voice PVCs or DLCIs on the IAD you should configure the voice path for voice operation to function correctly This chapter contains the following topics Basic
193. erform a task type the option and proceed to the appropriate section Pinging Network Devices To check for a device on a network follow these instructions 1 Type P on the Utilities menu To set up Ping to run supply the following information 1 Type the IP address or complete host name If you enter a host name you must enter the domain name with the host name For example mycomputer mydomain com 2 Type the ping packet size 3 Type the number of times to ping 0 causes Ping to run until you press Escape The IAD displays the following report Pinging 91 1 1 217 Size 32 bytes Ping Number 1 of 1 Esc to quit Reply from 91 1 1 217 Size 32 bytes Time lt 5 mS x Ping Summary Packets Sent sal Packets Received 1 Packets Lost Q Average Ping Time lt 5 ms NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 37 Using Trace Route Use Trace Route to trace the network route to a specified host To run Trace Route follow these steps 1 Type x on the Utilities menu and press Enter 2 Type the IP address or host name to trace and press Enter If you enter a host name you must enter the domain name with the host name For example mycomputer mydomain com The IAD displays each hop as shown in the following sample report Trace Route Results to 91 1 1 1 1 5ms OF E dead Setting up the USI Port 7000 The USI port is available only on IADs in the 7000 family To set up the USI
194. es based on the configuration interfaces and ports on the IAD Table 12 1 Current Configuration Report Parameter Software version Serial Number Contains DSP chip s Routing Information Protocol Bridging Bridge Database Aging Time Spanning Tree Spanning Tree bridge priority Spanning Tree hello time Spanning Tree max age Spanning Tree forward delay Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP IP and EOC SNMP System Contact SNMP System Name SNMP System Location SNMP Community SNMP Trap Host IP Address Multicasting Telnet Server Port DNS Server IP Address DNS Server Timeout Application Information Support File Information Interface type Admin state Physical state Description version of IAD firmware serial number of the IAD no of DSP chips in the IAD Status enabled disabled globally Status enabled disabled globally 1 3600 seconds default 300 seconds enabled disabled globally 1 65 535 default 32 768 1 10 seconds default 2 seconds 6 40 seconds default 20 seconds 4 30 seconds default 15 seconds Status enabled disabled user defined maximum 39 characters user defined maximum 39 characters user defined maximum 39 characters name must match the SNMP host maximum 39 alphanumeric characters If SNMP is enabled and the SNMP Community Name is null SNMP goes into read only mode IP address of the SNMP trap host Status enabled disabled port number of the Telnet serve
195. es packets between two network segments that use the same communications protocol A router generally improves overall efficiency for a complex network but a bridge provides better speed and flexibility for the overall network NOTE Verilink recommends that bridged network architecture be thoroughly understood prior to configuring the IAD Suggested reading Interconnections Bridges and Routers by Radia Perlman Addison Wesley 1992 Bridges operate at the data link layer Layer 2 of the OSI reference model In general a bridge filters forwards or floods an incoming frame based on the MAC address of that frame This chapter contains the following topics Basic Bridge Setup Tasks page 130 Using the Bridge Configuration Menu page 131 Enabling and Disabling Bridging Globally page 132 Enabling and Disabling Bridging by Port page 132 Configuring the Bridge Aging Timer page 134 Enabling and Disabling Spanning Tree Globally page 134 Enabling and Disabling Spanning Tree by Port page 134 Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Priority page 135 Configuring Spanning Tree Port Priority page 135 Configuring Spanning Tree Hello Time page 136 Configuring Spanning Tree Max Age page 136 Configuring Spanning Tree Forward Delay page 137 Configuring Spanning Tree Path Cost page 137 Deleting a Bridge Forwarding Database Entry page 138 OAR dE E E JE aE aE aE aE A ae a R NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the c
196. est The IAD terminates the test and displays the menu Performing a Power Supply Test The power supply test checks the IAD power supply SLIC and CODEC To perform a power supply test 1 Type s on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Power Supply Test 2 The IAD tests each POTS line and reports the status 3 Continue with other tests or press Escape twice to return to the Main menu Performing a Phone Detect Test The Phone Detect test detects POTS devices on each of the voice ports To perform a Phone Detect test 1 Type P on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Phone Detect Test 2 The IAD tests for the presence of a POTS device on each port and reports the status 3 Continue with other tests or press Escape twice to return to the Main menu Performing a Ring Test The ring test rings all voice port lines either simultaneously or individually in sequence To perform a ring test 1 Type R on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Ring Test 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Ring all lines YN or ESC y Type Y to test all lines NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 263 Type N to test a specific line The IAD prompts you for the port number 3 The IAD prompts you to perform the test sequentially or concurrently Ring lines concurrently or sequentially CS or ESC s Type s to perform the test sequentially or type C to perform the test concurrently The IAD displays info
197. et Server Port 2 The IAD displays the current IP address and a prompt Enter Telnet Server Port 23 Type the new Telnet Server port the default is 23 3 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration IP filtering allows for selective deletion of incoming and or outgoing packets The IAD inspects each packet and based on configured filters allows them to pass or deletes them This feature may be used as a firewall to only allow known good packets to pass though the IAD NOTE Because each packet must be tested against one or more filters IP filtering may significantly affect IAD performance To configure IP Filtering type F on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu Figure 5 6 IP Filtering Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKKKKKK KKK Status IP Filtering Configuration Menu Messages KKEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK K KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK for IP Filtering Editing Unselected Port Input filters display here P Choose port for IP filtering Globally enable disable input or output filters Toggle input or output type filters to view edit Display all filters of the chosen type Insert new or buffered filter of chosen type Append new or buffered filter to end of list
198. et of filters in the order in which the filters display in the list shown on the user interface Configure IP Router gt Configure IP Filtering gt Display all filters of the chosen type Each packet moves down the list of filters until it reaches the end or the attributes of an active filter match the packet When a match occurs the packet is then processed according to the action field Pass or Discard of the first filter that matched the packet Pass packet passed to the next level Discard packet discarded When output packets are dropped RTCS_OK is returned from IP_route When you create a new filter all fields are set to an inactive state An inactive filter passes all IP packets you must modify at least one field to narrow the range of packets to pass or change the action to discard all packets To create a set of filters to pass only certain types of packets you need to create a default filter that discards all packets and then insert narrower filters before the default filter For example you need to add a filter to cover each range of packets To select only the packet ranges to discard no default filter needed because the default action is to pass all packets You only add filters that set the range to discard and set the actions of those filters to discard The order of the filters matters if you are mixing filters with different actions or if you want the overlapping filters to display accurate statistics
199. evice zero if ICMP protocol These two values are separated by the symbol lt gt out_port Port number assigned by NAT which is translated by NAT to from the local port pkts Out packets sent from the local device to the foreign device In packets sent from the foreign device to the local device state TCP state number TCP only idle Idle time in seconds for the connection When NAT is enabled you can display details about a specific connection To display the connection details type D on the NAT Configuration menu and enter the public IP address The IAD prompts you for the outside port number of the connection Enter outside port number of connection Type the outside port number and press Enter The IAD displays the NAT connection details sample Foreign IP 11 33 13 52 Local IP 192 168 1 1 Ports outside 50000 inside 4428 foreign 23 outgoing pkts 13 bytes 544 incoming pkts 13 bytes 1229 Type TCP seconds since use 37 TCP Seq 2140945885 Ack 19105386 state 4 Retrys Local 0 Foreign 0 Bad checksum Local 0 Foreign 0 NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration 198 If the connection is not open the IAD advises you Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 4 NAT Connection Details Report Entry Foreign IP Local IP Outside port Inside port Foreign port Outgoing packets bytes Incoming packets bytes Type Seconds since us
200. ew MTU for this Port gt Type the new MTU value 100 1500 and press Enter When set at 1500 IP fragmentation is disabled 3 The IAD saves the changes 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 110 Enabling When you enable RIP the IAD sends routing data to adjacent routers and and dynamically learns the associated network topology Disabling Enabling RIP Globally RIP To enable or disable RIP globally follow these steps 1 Type R on the Router Configuration menu to select Enable Disable RIP 2 The IAD displays the current status of RIP and a prompt RIP is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable RIP globally or D to disable it globally 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NOTE For RIP to function correctly you must enable RIP globally or locally by port and set the RIP version The order in which you perform the procedures is irrelevant m Enabling and Disabling RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port To enable or disable RIP poisoned reverse by port 1 Type P on the Router Configuration men
201. ew subnet mask for this interface Type the new subnet mask usually 255 255 255 0 and press Enter 7 The IAD displays the following instructions Select priority Normal High N H N Give the interface normal priority type N or press Enter 8 Type y or Enter to save the new IP address and subnet mask 9 To exit press Escape then type y to terminate the session 10 Quit the terminal emulator program 11 Reset the IAD following for the new IP address to be in effect NOTE When you configure the IAD you must restart the IAD each time you change the settings for those changes to take effect You may make several configuration changes before resetting if you choose for efficiency If you plan to use Telnet for configuration tasks this is a good time to disconnect the serial cable from the PC and IAD Many configuration tasks require that you reset or restart the IAD before the new settings or configuration will take effect When you use the menu interface or the Command Line Interface on page 243 to make changes or change the physical characteristics of the IAD such as changing the Ethernet port MAC address you must reset the IAD The IAD stores all configuration settings in memory When it restarts it loads the last configuration saved before it was powered down or restarted When restarting is required it will be included as a step in the configuration process You can reset the IAD in two ways To reset the IAD from t
202. figur ing AAL2 LES CCS ELCP ATM Adaptation Layer 2 Loop Emulation Services AAL2 LES is a broadband local loop emulation service specifically telephony that uses the ATM AAL2 adaptation layer CCS ELCP is defined by ETSI EN 300 432 1 and ETSI EN 300 347 1 When the voice gateway is specified as AAL2 LES CCS ELCP also known as V5 2 signaling type E on the Main menu to display the AAL2 LES CCS ELCP menu Figure 7 26 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK C Configuration D Debugging S Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Configuring for AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Type c to display the Manual Configuration menu Figure 7 27 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKKKK KK KKK Configuration KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK Variant and Interface Management PSTN NPL Parameters Static CID Allocation User State Control Manual ATM Pace Control PanaA lt Configuring Variant Interface Management Type v to display the Variant Interface Management menu Figure 7 28 Variant Interface Management Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Variant Interface Management KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK Display Variant Configure PSTN P
203. figure Toggle CMCP Debugging Manage MGCP Embedded Client Selection Options E A and O vary depending on the Voice Gateway selected in the Voice Path Configure command These options only display when logged on as Supervisor OMUDVDDANH BZRBVOMADOUWNE Figure 2 5 Main Menu for Network Administrator KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Main Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure SNMP Configure Login System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure Multicast Configure NAT Diagnostics Menu Reset System DNABAZVOOMIYWNE Figure 2 6 Main Menu for User KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Main Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK 1 Reports Menu 8 Configure Login NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide Navigating the IAD Menu Interface Menus in the IAD configuration system are arranged hierarchically That is you select single key options to navigate down to display specialized menus and specific tasks and press the Escape key successively to return back to menus higher in the interface The specific menus submenus and commands that display depend on the interfaces for the specific IAD the options configured and the security level that you use to log in To select a menu item just type the option displayed to the left of the item Alt
204. figured on the selected port the IAD displays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port The IAD displays the status of bridging on this interface and port anda prompt Bridging over T1 E1 Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable bridging on this port or D to disable it The IAD updates the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu Type Y to confirm your changes or press Escape to cancel If you confirm the IAD saves the settings If bridging is enabled and an IP address is assigned on the WAN interface the IAD displays the IP Over Bridge prompt Both bridging and IP address are specified for this interface Currently IP over bridge is enabled Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable IP Over Bridge on the WAN port or D to disable it The IAD updates the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each port on which you want to enable or disable bridging Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Setting the Bridge Aging Timer Enabling and Disabling STP T 134 The bridge aging timer establishes the amount of time that the IAD ke
205. for changes to take effect Configur You can configure up to 10 DHCP client entries Type c to configure DHCP naa POE i aaa f e isplays the gateway address and prompt Client Entry Enter Client entry number to configure 1 10 1 Type the client entry number you re configuring and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the current Mac address for this entry DHCP Client MAC address is 00 00 00 00 00 00 New MAC Address x x x _ x Type the MAC address in the template provided 3 The IAD displays the current host name and prompt Host name is currently Enter new Host Name Type the new host name and press Enter 4 The IAD displays an update option Respond y to override the lease time default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for Lease Time Enter N to use a default value Enter Lease Time in seconds for this Client 3600 Type the lease time for this entry and press Enter 5 The IAD displays an update option Respond Y to override the IP address default for this entry Enter Y to enter a value for IP Address Enter N to use a default value Current IP address 0 0 0 0 Enter new IP address Type the IP address for this entry and press Enter 6 The IAD displays an update option Respond Y to override the subnet mask default for this entry NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 176 Enter Y to enter a value for Subnet Mask Enter N to use a default value
206. for the selected gateway after reset 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Manual Configuration Type c to display the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu current settings eliminated from this example Figure 7 23 AAL2 LES Manual Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK AAL2 LES Manual Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK P Enable Disable Ports R Set CAS refreshing rate Enable Disable idle CAS refreshing Change Max CPS SDU Size 45 64 Octets Set Combine Use Timer Enable Disable User State Control Enable Disable Dialed Digit anual ATM Pace Control PUGCHMNH Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Ports 1 Type P to enable and disable ports 2 The IAD displays the port control prompt Port Control x 10011001 Enter a zero 0 in each port location to disable the port enter a 1 in each port location to enable the port Press Enter to complete the step 3 The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Setting the CAS Refresh Rate 1 Type R to set the CAS refresh rate 2 The IAD displays this prompt New CAS refreshing rate in seconds 0 to DISABLE Enter a zero 0 to disable CAS refresh or enable CAS refresh by entering a non zero refresh rate value 3 The IAD displa
207. g Timer Enable Disable Spanning Tree Globally Enable Disable Spanning Tree by Port Configure Spanning Tree Bridge Priority Configure Spanning Tree Port Priority Configure Spanning Tree Hello Time Configure Spanning Tree Max Age Configure Spanning Tree Forward Delay Configure Spanning Tree Path Cost OU AANnTODAOH PNA Delete Bridge Forwarding Database Entry You may sign on as Supervisor or Network Manager to configure the IAD as a bridge Options that display in the Bridge Configuration menu are the same for both security levels NOTE Be sure to reset the IAD when you are done making changes to bridge configuration Resetting the IAD causes the configuration changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Enabling and Disabling Bridging int T 132 For bridging to function correctly you must enable bridging both globally or by port and then set the bridge aging timer At least two ports must be enabled for bridging to function You must also disable RIP poisoned reverse The order in which you perform the procedures is irrelevant To enable routing globally Chapter 4 Router Configuration on page 103 you must disable bridging globally However you may enable routing on some ports and bridging on others depending on your requirements NOTE When bridging is disabled globally or on an interface port or an IP address is unconfigured IP Over Bridge is disabled automatically
208. g from T1 to E1 If your IAD is set for T1 and it is being deployed in an E1 environment 1 2 Type 9 to switch from T1 to E1 The IAD displays this prompt T1 El mode is currently T1 Change T1 E1 mode to E1 Y yes Type Y to confirm The IAD resets the interface and saves the configuration When the interface is reset the IAD displays the WAN Configuration menu Switching from E1 to T1 If your IAD is set for E1 and it is being deployed in an T1 environment 1 2 Type 8 to switch from E1 to T1 The IAD displays this prompt T1 El mode is currently El Change T1 E1 mode to T1 Y yes Type Y to confirm The IAD performs the change resets the interface and saves the configuration When the interface is reset the IAD displays the WAN Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configur ing the T1 Interface 72 The tasks described in this section all begin on the T1 Configuration menu The tasks as described so you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the T1 interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the T1 Configuration menu 6200 8 This section is for configuring the T1 interface on the 6200 8 7216 or 7216 IAD Figure 4 24 T1 Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
209. g the state 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a USC message indicating that it is enabled or disabled 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Enabling and Disabling Dialed Digit 1 Type D to enable or disable dialed digit by toggling the state 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a message indicating that dialed digit will be enabled or disabled after reset 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Setting ATM Pace Control Manually Type A to set ATM Pace Control manually The IAD displays this menu Figure 7 24 Manual ATM Pace Control Menu KKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK anual ATM Pace Control KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK anual ATM pace control is disabled Audio bit rate margin is 0 inimum signaling bit rate is Obps P Manual ATM Pace Control A Audio Bit Rate Margin inimum Signaling Bit Rate Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Manual ATM Pace Control 1 Type P to enable or disable pace control 2 The IAD displays NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 164 T Manual ATM pace control disabled E D 3 Type E to enable pace control or D to disable pace control 4 You must reset the IAD page 15 before this change take
210. ge and press Enter 4 The remainder of this task is identical to the steps in Adding a DLCI following Proceed to step 3 in the next section and continue NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 94 Adding a DLCI To add a DLCI 1 On the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu type 1 to select Add New DLCI 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter dlci number Type a DLCI value between 16 and 1023 default is 32 for data and 33 for voice and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the FR Encapsulation Configuration menu Figure 4 57 Frame Relay Encapsulation Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK FR Encapsulation Configuration KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK Current Encapsulation 1 RAW No Encapsulation 2 Proprietary Voice DLCI 3 RFC 1490 4 ATM RFC 1483 None Tunneling Type the option corresponding to the encapsulation method you intend to use 4 The IAD displays the FR DLCI Options menu Figure 4 58 Frame Relay DLCI Options Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK FR DLCI Options KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK Current Encapsulation None 1 Configure Transmit CIR 2 Configure Receive CIR 3 Configure FRF 12 Fragmentation NOTE T To continue without configuring CIR or FRF 12 Fragmentation press Escape CIR is not required for bull bandwidth circuits Configuring Transmit CIR To
211. ger than frame acks for unsent data with data outside window with data after close segments with data segments with duplicate data segments with only an ACK segments with a duplicate ACK Total TCP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to other reasons listed in the following Destination port value in TCP header is zero Checksum value in TCP header is incorrect Size of the TCP header is less than 20 bytes Packet size is less than the TCP header size Packet is larger than the internal packet buffer Unacceptable invalid unsent acknowledge number in the TCP header The remote host has sent data beyond the window that the software could advertise TCP packets received in a Closed state connection Total segments received including those received in error This count includes segments received on currently established connections No of segments received with duplicate data Not used Not used NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 213 Table 12 6 TCP Statistics Report Parameter segments with a RST window probes window updates Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal destination port segments with data segments with retransmitted
212. gine 6300 To use one of the predefined configurations 1 On the Main menu type 5 to select Configure WAN 2 The IAD displays the WAN Configuration menu Figure 4 66 WAN Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK 7 WAN Configuration menu x KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Configuring SDSL 0 Quick Configuration 1 Configure Datalink Protocol 2 Configure Physical Interface Type 0 to select Quick Configuration 3 The IAD displays the Quick Configuration menu Figure 4 67 Quick Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KKK Quick Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK System will reset after changing configuration Current configuration Differs from listed configurations 1 Lucent Stinger Conexant Autobaud Payload Scrambling 2 Nokia Auto Cycle Coppermountain Auto Sense Paradyne Unframed 784kbps Payload Scrambling AccessLan CPE ATM Unframed 1152kbps fixed Frame Relay 784kbps fixed YHOO BB W 4 Type the option corresponding to the DSLAM to which the 6300 is connected 5 The 6300 automatically resets 6 To continue configuration log back on to the 6300 NetEngine IAD User Guide T 5 Router Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the IAD as a router You may configure the IAD as a router or a bridge depending on your application Optionally you may als
213. guring 126 IP Header Compression Statistics report 224 IP Over Bridging 132 IP Statistics report 209 IPCP IP Address Type menu 86 ISDN connecting to IAD 21 voice configuration menu for 141 ISDN telephones power consumption 21 J JetStream 282 JetStream call control settings for 158 jitter delay displaying 143 setting 142 L LAN connecting 20 LAN connection setting up 35 LAN IP broadcast destination configuring 127 last reset reason displaying and clearing 39 Line Build Out menu E1 77 Line Build Out menu T1 73 line build out setting for E1 77 line build out setting for T1 73 line rate selecting 62 line rate setting 64 LLC Encapsulation 82 83 84 85 Loop Gain menu 148 loop gain setting 148 loop start setting all ports 143 Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection menu 146 Loopback Configuration menu 74 loopback configuring for T1 73 Lucent 66 282 supported DSLAM 282 Lucent Stinger in Quick Configuration 102 Lucent Stinger TNT 2 5 M main menu for different users 17 Main Menu generally 13 maintenance protocol configuring in FR 99 Maximum Transmission Unit setting 109 media statistics reports generally 226 Memory Statistics reports 240 menu AAL2 Audio Profile 87 ADSL Standard Startup 69 ATM Configuration 90 ATM Encapsulation Configuration 82 ATM Peak Cell Rate Configuration 82 ATM PVC Config 81 ATM Service Category Configuration 82 BRI Diagnostics 266 Bridge Configuration 131 Channel Configuration 78 Cha
214. h LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to set for IP filtering and press Enter 4 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish IP filtering configuration Globally Enabling and Disabling Filters Use these commands to enable and disable the input and output filters for all installed interfaces You must globally enable the filters for the associated filtering to function properly To enable or disable the input and output filters follow these steps 1 On the IP Filtering Configuration menu type F to select Globally enable disable input or output filters 2 The IAD displays the status of input filters and a prompt Input Filters Disabled enter 1 to enable 0 to disable Type 1 to enable input filers or type 0 to disable them NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration T T 121 3 The IAD enables or disables input filters and displays the status of the output filters with another prompt Output Filters Disabled enter 1 to enable 0 to disable Type 1 to enable output filers or type 0 to disable them 4 The IAD saves the changes and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the
215. he addresses specify the two routers at each end while the two port numbers ensure the unique identification of each router pair When the IAD sends TCP or UDP connection from a local port to an Internet port it changes the sent IP address to the address of the Internet port Similarly it changes the TCP or UDP connection port number to a unique value within the NAT port range You can display the NAT settings with the Display NAT Local Server Table command NOTE Ensure that the NAT port range does not include any ports that use applications such as HTTP TFTP and so on To configure the NAT port range 1 Type R on the NAT Configuration menu to select the Configure NAT Port Range 2 The IAD displays the low end port range prompt Enter Low End of NAT Port Range 5000 65534 50000 Type the low end value and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the high end port range prompt Enter High End of NAT Port Range 50000 65534 50000 Type the high end value and press Enter 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the NAT Configuration menu 5 Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuring NAT NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration Configuring the NAT Alias Entry 195 Each NAT alias entry allows a device on the LAN inside of NAT to be accessible from the Internet via a unique IP address The IAD
216. he menu 1 On the Main menu type R to select Reset System The IAD displays the following instructions Press R to Reset now gt 2 Type R again This resets and starts the IAD with your new settings 3 To log in again enter your user ID and password To reset the IAD manually On a 6000 family IAD unplug the power adapter from the IAD and then plug it back into the IAD On a 7000 family IAD turn the IAD off then back on Be sure to complete your task and return to the Main menu before restarting the IAD in this manner CAUTION Resetting the IAD terminates all telephone calls and computer sessions in progress You should ensure that there no services are being rendered before resetting the IAD NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide Connecting To manage the IAD via the LAN or Intranet you must set an IP address via Telnet for the Ethernet port before you can use Telnet to access the IAD NOTES Although you can also access the IAD using Telnet via the WAN provided a management DLCI or PVC is configured along with a WAN IP address this section describes connecting via the LAN For information about setting the IP address of the WAN port see Chapter 6 WAN Configuration on page 51 m If you configure a RADIUS server you must use a RADIUS authenticated User ID password for Telnet access If the RADIUS server or the connection to the RADIUS server goes down Telnet access will not work For information about c
217. hing LAN Speed and Duplex Mode 1 Type the option number of the speed and duplex mode 2 The IAD saves the configuration Press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NOTE Full duplex Ethernet operation is controlled by the switch If the switch is set to full duplex you may enable it in the IAD If you enable full duplex Ethernet in the IAD when the switch is operating in normal half duplex mode your IAD will not communicate on the LAN You can display the current LAN settings using the Display Current Configuration command in the Reports menu page 203 NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Using System Utilities 36 The Utilities menu contains utility commands and several menus to upgrade ACOS software and support ACOS application development To display the Utilities menu type 9 on the Main menu 7000 family IADs display a menu with option U the USI port command Figure 3 6 Utilities Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKKK KKK KKK Utilities Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK Ping Utility Trace Route ake a USI Module a UART port Configure Console Baud Rate Configure Console Timeout Hard Reset or Reload ACOS from FLASH Set System Default Save System Settings as Defaults Display Event Log Clear Last Reset Reason File System Men Debug Menu File Transfer Menu xO PHABSoWAsnacH To p
218. hone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area NOTE REN is associated with loop start and ground start ports Do not use for E amp M or digital ports If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance However if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could effect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with the NE6100 4 or NE6200 8 please contact Verilink for information on obtaining service or repairs The Telephone Comp
219. hough character options are displayed in upper case the IAD accepts both upper and lower case options It is not necessary to press Enter after typing the selection to execute it the IAD immediately responds with a request for input or another menu for more options For a hierarchical map of the Main menu its menus and commands see Appendix A Menu Map on page 275 Entering Settings and Values When the IAD requests input for a setting or configuration value type it at the prompt Press the Enter key to terminate the input and proceed to the next step The IAD responds with error messages if a value is incorrect or it displays the current menu so you can continue with related tasks Using Default or Current Values The IAD displays a default or current value in parentheses immediately to the right of each message just to the left of the command prompt To accept this value just press the Enter key For example when the following message displays Enter a new subnet mask for this interface 255 255 259 0 You may press Enter to cause the IAD to set 255 255 255 0 asthe subnet mask value Using the Enter key to skip through default or current values often speeds the process of proceeding through a family of input steps to quickly get to the input step where you want to change a value NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide Basic IAD Configur ation Connecting LAN WAN USI and Telephones T 20 Ex
220. ics KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK D Dialup Test Hotline Test Ring Test Power Supply Test Phone Detect Test Ring Test On Off Hook Test nfineon Codec Test O W UWO W TE NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 261 T NOTES Pots diagnostics are intrusive tests Any active calls will be terminated You should terminate all voice gateway activity prior to continuing with any POTS diagnostic testing The Infineon CODEC test is reserved for Verilink use only To perform a specific test type the option and proceed to the corresponding section Performing a Dialup Test The dialup test verifies the operational status of each telephone station by allowing the user to dial another POTS phone on the IAD by dialing the port number To perform a dialup test 1 Type D on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select Dialup Test 2 The IAD displays this prompt Dialup test mode Pick up any handset and dial the number of the line you want to test Take the selected handset offhook listen for dial tone and dial the port number Hang up after a successful connection The IAD reports the status of each action Line 1 off hook Line 1 hung up Line 5 off hook Line 5 hung up Press Escape to terminate the test The IAD terminates the test and displays the menu Performing a Hotline Test The hotline test allows line to line telephone connections on a single IAD without r
221. ics Display Interface Statistics Display Media Statistics Display Route Table Display ARP Table Display Bridge Forwarding Database Display Bridge Status Display PPP Authorization Entries Display System Uptime Display Memory Statistics Zero All Statistics NOQGQUNWPDA ERHAQ Most options on the Reports menu generate a specific report However the Network Statistics Interface Statistics and Media Statistics options display a menu of several related reports and commands to reset accumulated statistics To display a report or group of reports or to clear statistics for a particular protocol or interface select the option and proceed to the appropriate section NOTE When viewing a report press any key to display the next page or return to the Reports menu at the end of the report Press Escape to return to the Reports menu at any time NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Current Configur ation Report 203 To display the Current Configuration report enter c on the Reports menu The Current Configuration report displays configuration settings and information about the installed interfaces on your IAD For each port on the IAD details are displayed For each interface configured on a port details are also displayed The parameters are repeated and not described again in the table The information displayed in the Current Configuration report is listed in Table 12 1 The contents of this report vari
222. igh Voltage Setting per port Type the option for the task to perform Proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Idle High Voltage Globally 1 Type 1 to enable or disable idle high voltage for all ports 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable idle high voltage for all ports or D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Displaying Idle High Voltage Settings Type 2 to display the idle high voltage setting on each port The IAD displays the following report 1 Low Voltage 2 Low Voltage 3 Low Voltage 4 Low Voltage Press any key to return to the Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection menu Enabling and Disabling Idle High Voltage for a Specific Port 1 Type 3 to enable or disable idle high voltage for a specific port 2 The IAD displays the port prompt Select Line 1 8 Type the port number to set 3 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable idle high voltage or D to disable it 4 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to display the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration Reset the IAD Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NetEngi
223. iguration Configuring Multicast cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 182 Enabling and Disabling Global IP Multicast e 182 Configuring PIM Dense Mode by Pott seeeeeeees 183 Managing Multicast Route SOUrCE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 Adding a Multicast Routing Source eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 184 Removing a Multicast Routing Source eeeeeeeeeeee 185 Displaying the Multicast Routing Source eee 185 Displaying the IGMP GrouD cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeee 186 Displaying the IGMP QUETiIeL ccccceeceeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeteees 186 Displaying the Multicast Routing Table eee 186 Displaying the PIM Neighbor viivecensisencseccvicerecassexexmetieeeeeese 187 Chapter 11 NAT Configuration The NAT Configuration Menu cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 190 Enabling NAT Translation cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 191 Configuring NAT Local Servet ccceessecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Configuring NAT THMC QUIS sentiiniicicainiiatevavidetiveicitiweriteantnnte 193 Configuring the NAT Port Range ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 194 Configuring the NAT Alias Entry cceecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 195 NAT StatiStiCS atic ocesecssiceetgeto cet cantatas dete aadatan aani andea 196 NAT Connection Table ccceecccceeeeeeesecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeees 197 NAT Connection De
224. iguring NAT Timeouts page 193 Configuring the NAT port range page 194 Configuring the NAT Alias Entry page 195 Displaying NAT Statistics page 196 Displaying the NAT Connection Table page 197 Displaying NAT Connection Details page 197 Displaying the NAT Local Server Table page 199 Displaying the NAT Alias Table page 199 Deleting an IP Address from NAT Tables page 199 Deleting a NAT Local Server Entry page 200 Deleting a NAT Alias Entry page 200 NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration The NAT Configuration Menu m 190 Enabling and managing NAT involves several tasks These are all displayed and accessed on the NAT Configuration menu which you display by typing N on the Main menu Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the NAT Configuration menu Figure 11 1 NAT Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK NAT Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Enable Disable NAT Debug Messages Enable Disable NAT Translation by Port Configure NAT TCP Timeout Configure NAT UDP Timeout Configure NAT Port Range Configure NAT Local Server Entry Configure NAT Alias Entry Display NAT Statistics Display NAT Connection Table Display NAT Connection Details Display NAT Local Server Table Display NAT Alias Table Delete IP Address from NAT Tables Delete NAT Local Server Entry Delete NAT Alias Entry NK XHOUQNPAAQHUW
225. ile and press Enter To exit without transferring the file press Escape or Enter without typing the file name 4 When XMODEM is selected if the file is not located the IAD prompts you for the file transfer speed 5 The IAD transfers the file via TFTP or XMODEM 6 Perform a hard reset to reset the IAD page 38 whenever you load a new version of ACOS Performing a normal reset is not recommended Updating the System 1 Type x to update the IAD by transferring the upgrade package of files provided by Verilink The number and type of files varies by IAD The IAD uses TFTP to download files sequentially to the IAD 1 The IAD displays the confirmation prompt Are you sure Y or N Type Y to continue or any other character to escape 2 The IAD prompts for the IP address of the TFTP Server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter The IAD transfers each of the system files 3 When the file transfers are complete perform a hard reset to restart the IAD page 38 Performing a normal reset after updating the system is not recommended Using File Transfer Utilities To perform file transfers for any files type A to display the File Transfer Method menu to download a file to the file system in the IAD The IAD displays the File Method menu 1 Type 1 to use TFTP or 2 to use XMODEM to transfer the file to the IAD If you select XMODEM proceed to step 3 2 The IAD displays the pr
226. ine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 214 Table 12 7 UDP Statistics Report Parameter discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons with destination port zero bad checksums packets smaller than header packets larger than frame unopen ports Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal destination port Description Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to other reasons listed in the following Destination Port field value in UDP header is zero Checksum field value in UDP header is incorrect Size of UDP header is less than 8 bytes Packet size is less than the UDP header size Packet is larger than the internal packet buffer Total UDP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Destination Port field value in UDP header is illegal Clearing Network Statistics To clear network statistics type z on the Network Statistics menu The IAD displays the Clear Network Statistics menu Figure 12 3 Clear Network Statistics Menu C Clear ICMP Statistics G Clear IGMP Statistics I Clear IP Statistics P Clear PIM Statistics T Clear TCP Statistics U Clear UDP Statistics To permanently
227. ine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 284 Table C 6 6000 Family Transport Protocol Features Feature ATM Adaption Layers Encapsulation AAL2 Profiles Voice Data Security Voice QoS Data QoS Cell Delay Variation Buffer OAM Cell Handling Frame Relay Encapsulation Voice Data Data Link Format Data Link Control Data Internetworking Framing Description AAL2 voice AAL5 data AAL5 layer 3 voice RFC 1483 multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM RFC 2364 PPP over ATM ITU 366 2 AAL2 ATM 9 10 11 and ITU 1 Single AAL2 PVC Up to 8 AAL5 PVCs Software configurable payload scrambling CBR VBR rt CBR UBR Configurable 0 30 ms F4 F5 segment and end to end loopbacks RFC 1490 multiprotocol encapsulation over Frame Relay Single PVC 8 Data Link Identifiers DLCI Q 922 FRF 12 support adjustable jitter buffer FRF 5 FRF 8 support HDLC support Table C 7 6000 Family Configuration and Management Features Feature Description Upgrades Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP Telnet local and remote Security Multi level password protection Firewall IP Filtering Management SNMP 1 0 menu based configuration via Telnet local and remote console local NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 285 Table C 8 6000 Family Security Features Feature Firewall NAT Management Security Authentication Description IP Filtering in and
228. ing 90 FCC Notice xvi fers 45 file copying 42 file directory displaying 41 file system formatting 42 free space determining 42 using generally 41 File System menu 41 File Transfer menu 34 45 File Transfer Method menu 45 file transfers performing 45 files deleting 42 renaming 42 firewall configuration 169 fragmentation selecting in FR 97 frame mode setting for T1 72 Frame Relay configuring generally 97 in Quick Configuration 102 frame relay congestion parameters setting 100 CopperMountain CMCP setting 101 CopperMountain fragmentation setting 98 fragmentation selecting 97 FRF 12 configuration 97 maintenance protocol configuring 99 Frame Relay Congestion Configuration menu 100 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration menu 93 Frame Relay DLC Options menu 94 Frame Relay Encapsulation Configuration menu 94 Frame Relay Fragmentation Configuration menu 97 Frame Relay FRF 12 Configuration menu 98 Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol menu 100 Frame Relay Options menu 97 Frame Relay Statistics report 227 Frame CRC4 mode selecting 76 FRF 12 Fragmentation configuring 95 FRF 12 configuration in FR 97 G G SHDSL connecting to IAD 21 G SHDSL interface configuring 61 G2237 xDSL Configuration Menu 61 G2237 xDSL Configuration menu 60 G2237 xDSL interface type selecting 60 G2237 xDSL Statistics report 231 G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration menu 69 G7070 ADSL Statistics report 235 General Bandwidth 282 ground start setting all ports 143 Gr
229. ion about setting the IP address of the WAN port see Chapter 6 WAN Configuration on page 51 Copying the Source Files Typically you will receive two ZIP files a core ZIP file and an application ZIP file for each upgrade First extract each file into a single directory on your PC Then set the directory as the path that the TFTP Server will use to send files to the IAD often identified as upload download or outbound directory Upgrading via TFTP If your TFTP Server is not running start it now and note the IP address of the computer it is running on To upgrade the IAD software 1 On the Main menu type 9 to display the Utilities menu Figure 3 3 Utilities Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK Utilities Menu Ba a a ae Pa SER a kokk tkk 9 SY ge Tag a Pa Tae go EE eo RT Ss eg a SE Ping Utility Trace Route Configure Console Baud Rate Configure Console Timeout Hard Reset or Reload ACOS from FLASH Set System Default Save System Settings as Defaults Display Event Log Clear Last Reset Reason File System Menu Debug Menu File Transfer Menu KOH pmsuyanyty NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 34 2 Type x to display the File Transfer menu Figure 3 4 File Transfer Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK File Transfer Menu KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KEK KK KEK B Load Boot ROM O Update ACOS acos bin X Update Ent
230. iority Indication bit is on No of OAM Operation And Maintenance cells received No of cells received with EFCI Explicit Forward Congestion Indication bit is on No of RM Resource Management cells received No of received packets discarded due to Unknown VPI VCI numbers Bad Cell headers Size of cells received is larger than PDU size other reasons as required No of valid ATM cell sent NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 230 Table 12 20 ATM Statistics Report Field OAM Tx CLPI Tx EFCI Tx RM Tx Rx HEC Errors Lost Cell Delineation OCD Time in OCD ATM Sync Description No of cells transmitted with CLPI Cell Loss Priority Indication bit is on No of OAM Operation And Maintenance cells transmitted No of cells transmitted with EFCI Explicit Forward Congestion Indication bit is on No of RM Resource Management cells transmitted No of cells receives with HEC errors in the header No of times cell delineation was lost Amount of time in OCD condition Current ATM Synchronization status Established or Lost NetEngine IAD User Guide 231 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Table 12 21 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Parameter Operational State Start Progress Operational Seconds Up Down Counter Received SNR Mean SQ Error Initial Received SNR Loop Attenuation Actual PSD Mask Framer Sync LOSW Status Total Seconds Errored Sec
231. ire System A File Transfer Utilities 3 Type x to update the entire system you must use TFTP Respond by typing Y to continue 4 The IAD displays the following x Download using TFTP Enter ip address of TFTP server 98 121 1 167 gt 5 Type the IP address of the TFTP Server and press Enter As file transfer progresses the IAD reports the status of each file being copied Two files acos bin and boot bin will only be copied if they match the platform to guard against loading incorrect system files onto an IAD NOTE If the IAD cannot locate the first file to download typically release dat the update will fail Make sure you have assigned a valid IP address and subnet mask and you re on the same subnet as the TFTP Server Use the Ping command to successfully ping the IAD and try again T Upon completion the IAD reports the success or failure of these files specifically and then reports the completion of file transfer and resets NOTE For more information refer to Upgrading Imbedded Software on an IAD with TFTP from Verilink T Verifying the Upgrade To verify that the files downloaded successfully observe the boot sequence The IAD displays the software version in the Verilink banner RTOS start sequence kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkxk kxxk kxx k Enter i to Inhibit Application Launching only Enter I to additionally Inhi
232. isable Outward Payload Loopback 2 Enable Disable Outward Line Loopback 3 Enable Disable Inward Loopback 4 Enable Disable Receive of ESF Loopback Commands Type the option number 1 2 or 3 to enable or disable Outward Payload Outward Line and Inward Line Loopback Inward Loopback is valid only when the IAD is in Master Mode 3 The IAD makes the change and resets the interface Press any key to display the menu Type 4 to enable or disable receipt of ESF loopback commands This option is valid only when framing mode is set to ESF The IAD saves the changes and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration gt Configuring the Transmit and Receive Channels Type 6 to select Configure Transmit Channels or 7 to select Configure Receive Channels The IAD displays a message indicating the number of channels enabled and displays the Channel Configuration menu Figure 4 28 Channel Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Channel Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK Enable All Channels x Disable All Channels Select Individual Channels x Select Channel Range DB WN H Esc To Return To Previous menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK For each option proceed to the corresponding section En
233. isplays a list of interfaces Port DLCI Encapsulation 1 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Type the number of the port The IAD displays a prompt Enter Priority for Slot 2 Port 1 0 255 Type the priority value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each port on which you want to set the priority Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration To set the Spanning Tree hello time a value between 1 and 10 seconds default 2 follow these steps 1 2 Type H on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Hello Time The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Bridge Hello Time 1 10 2 Type the priority value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to return to the Bridge Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration To set the Spanning Tree maximum age a value between 6 40 seconds default 20 follow these steps 1 2 wo Type s on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Max Age The IAD displays the following prompt Enter Spanning Tree Max Age 6 40 20 Type the maximum age value and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration
234. it command to return to the menu interface CLI Help Display a list of all commands in the command line interface by typing help atthe prompt To display the parameters for a specific command type command followed by a question mark For example set wan ip address Command Line Syntax The command line interface supports the following syntax command lt required parameters gt optional parameters For example set wan ip address 192 3 4 5 255 255 255 0 2 001 The required parameters are IP address lt 192 3 4 5 gt and netmask lt 255 255 255 0 gt The optional parameters are the slot 2 interface 0 port 0 and connection 1 The command and its parameters are NOT case sensitive Command Example For each command in the interface the following information is provided Description This section describes the command in general Immediately following the description is the command itself along with its required and optional parameters set wan stp bridge lt on off gt slot interface port If a command has parameters they are listed individually and described Keywords are listed separated by an OR bar to indicate one keyword is allowed as well as upper and lower parameter value limits NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 244 on off Keywords to enable on or disable off STP slot Numeric value identifying the connection 0 3 interface Always 0 Discussion This op
235. ith DSLAMs based on Alcatel Texas Instruments MetaLink and Globespan chip sets These include Lucent Stinger TNT Nokia Speedlink System Promatory IMAS AccessLan PacketLoop Accelerated Networks AN 3200 CopperMountain CopperEdge and Paradyne GranDSLAM DSLAMs for example Seamless voice and high speed data integration over xDSL or T1 E1 Supports data rates from 144 Kbps to 2 3 Mbps and customer premise interfaces including POTS 10 100BaseT Ethernet BRI Compatible with WAN protocols including ATM and Frame Relay BRI IAD supports ISDN BRI telephone interface RJ11 POTS interface with Loop Start or Ground Start Dynamic and static IP routing and bridging capabilities Firewall support via IP filtering DHCP and NAT to support IP address management Management capabilities including Telnet SNMP and TFTP eee IADs in the 6000 family are characterized by different WAN interfaces and different voice capacity NetEngine 6100 ADs provides WAN access over ADSL and telephone support for 4 or 8 voice ports 6100 4 and 6108 NetEngine 6200 8 IAD provides WAN access via T1 lines and provides 8 voice ports NetEngine 6200c ADs provides WAN access via channelized T1 E1 lines and provides 4 or 8 voice ports 6204c and 6208c NetEngine 6300 ADs provides voice services and high speed Internet or corporate connectivity over SDSL and provides 4 or 8 voice ports 6300 4 and 6300 8 NetEngine IAD User Guide Introd
236. ith SNMP disabled When SNMP is enabled and the settings are configured you can use SNMP to remotely manage the IAD by getting and setting IAD values and monitoring IAD events The IAD supports the following SNMP settings System Contact System Name System Location SNMP Community SNMP Trap Host IP Address af vmoa 0172 AAL2 LES The following SNMP traps are supported LR e E E E d System reset Attempts to access SNMP with an invalid community name Starting and stopping TFTP within SNMP The IAD supports MIBs for RFCs 1213 1317 1406 1493 1463 as well as af vmoa 0172 AAL2 LES MIB Using the SNMP Configuration Menu To display the SNMP Configuration menu type 7 on the Main menu The following SNMP tasks are accessed from this menu Figure 3 2 SNMP Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK SNMP Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK Enable Disable SNMP via IP Enable Disable SNMP via EOC Enable SNMP via both IP and EOC Disable SNMP via both IP and EOC Configure System Contact Configure System Name Configure System Location Configure SNMP Community Configure SNMP Trap Host IP Address Enable Disable SNMP Traps via EOC Configure Restart Trap Max Delay T GAH QR 2U wW PAA When you are done updating SNMP settings you must reset the IAD for the new settings to take effect NOTE The strings you enter in SNMP are not case sens
237. ith other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration Configuring Transmit Clock Source Type 8 to select Configure Transmit Clock Source and display the Select Tx Clock Source menu and status message Figure 4 29 Select Tx Clock Source Menu KKKEKKKKKKK KKK KKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK Select Tx Clock Source KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Tx Clock is derived from Rx clock Slave Mode 1 External Slave Mode 2 Internal Master Mode Type 1 to select external or slave mode or type 2 to select Internal or master mode 7 The IAD saves the configuration and resets the interface 8 Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 9 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configur ing the E1 Interface 76 Displaying Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log The physical layer statistics displays the T1 error rate in errors per second for the past second An event log up to 5KB is maintained for certain events The time stamp is relative to the last system reset As new events are added older events are discarded when the file size is maximized Events include the start and end of Telnet sessions SNMP access with an invalid community name system reset and system reset from menu command and the WAN link going up or down 1 Type P to disp
238. iting the Menu Interface To exit the menu interface return to the Main menu using the Escape key and press Escape one more time The IAD asks you to confirm press Y to exit or press Return to accept the default value N to cancel the exit After exiting you can quit the terminal emulator or Telnet application If you made changes to the configuration that require resetting the IAD be sure to do so before exiting Each IAD has a default configuration when it is shipped from the factory At a minimum you should view the configuration and check the following settings for probable update for each customer installation 1 Configure the LAN IP address if not already completed page 13 2 Configure each of the WAN options and the DSLAM profile WAN Configuration on page 51 3 Create and configure at least one DLCI page 93 or PVC page 81 for data traffic and set the WAN IP address WAN Configuration on page 51 4 Configure static or default route or enable bridging for all data traffic 5 Create and configure a DCLI page 93 or PVC page 81 for voice where required and select appropriate voice gateway settings 6 Reset the IAD page 15 to enable all configuration changes In this section you ll connect the IAD to the computer and telephone systems the IAD is intended to support Before proceeding make sure that you have an appropriate serial cable for your PC identify the LAN switching equipment where you ll connect th
239. itive NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 30 Enabling and Disabling SNMP via IP Type E to enable or disable SNMP via IP 1 The IAD displays the current status of SNMP and a prompt SNMP via IP is currently DISABLED To enable SNMP type E To disable SNMP type D 2 The IAD saves the configuration if changed Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Enabling and Disabling SNMP via EOC Type F to enable or disable SNMP via EOC 1 The IAD displays the current status of SNMP and a prompt SNMP via EOC is currently DISABLED To enable SNMP type E To disable SNMP type D 2 The IAD saves the configuration if changed Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Enabling SNMP via IP and EOC Type A to enable SNMP via IP and EOC The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Disabling SNMP via IP and EOC Type B to disable SNMP via IP and EOC The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Configuring the System Contact Type P to configure system contact up to 39 alph
240. ive Data A Request to Send A Clear to Send A DCE Ready A Signal Ground Receive Line Signal A Receive DCE Clock B Receive Line Signal B Transmit DTE Clock B Transmit DCE Clock B Clear to Send B Transmit Data B Transmit DCE Clock A Receive Data B Receive DCE Clock A Request to Send B DTE Ready A DCE Ready B DTE Ready B Transmit DTE Clock A RS 530 ON OORA ON 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 V 35 RS 449 A 1 P 4 R 6 C 7 D 9 E 13 B 19 F 11 X 26 29 W 35 AA 23 27 S 22 Y 5 T 24 V 8 25 H 12 31 30 U 17 NetEngine IAD User Guide Connector Pinouts 292 NetEngine IAD User Guide Glossary E Glossary 10 100BaseT 10 Mbps baseband Ethernet specification that uses two pairs of twisted pair cabling one pair for transmitting data and the other for receiving data 10 100BaseT has a distance limit of approximately 100 meters per segment 100BaseT 100 Mbps baseband Fast Ethernet specification that uses UTP wiring Like 10 100BaseT 100BaseT sends link pulses over the network segment when no traffic is present These link pulses contain more information than those used in 10 100BaseT ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ARP Address Resolution Protocol Enables routers to obtain the Ethernet address for a known IP address See also Inverse ARP ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol Used during
241. kxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkxkxk Current Rate Mode AUTO BAUD 1 Fixed 2 Auto Baud 3 Lucent Sync Delay Fixed 4 Lucent Sync Delay Auto Baud Sa Nokia Auto Cycle Type the option to select the rate mode If you set the rate mode to Nokia Auto Cycle you need to enter a line rate value 2 The IAD sets the rate mode and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu Selecting the Line Rate 1 Type 4 to display the current line rate and a prompt Line Rate is currently 88 Kbps Enter xDSL Line Rate Type a line rate value between 64 Kbps and 2320 Kbps which must be a value evenly divisible by 8 The IAD sets the rate and displays the xDSL Configuration Menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish WAN configuration Enabling and Disabling xDSL Debug Messages NOTE 2 3 Option D Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages is reserved for Verilink network engineers NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Configur ing the SDSL Interface 65 The tasks described in this section all begin on the SDSL Configuration menu You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the SDSL interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the SDSL Configuration menu 6300 4 This section is f
242. lay the physical layer statistics and the alarm log Error Count Rates Errors s Framing Bit Error Count Rate 1000 CRC Error Count Rate 333 Line Code Violation Count Rate 0 Rx Loss of Frame Count Rate 0 Change Of Frame Alignment Rate 0 Severely Errored Frame Rate 3 ALARM LOG Last 10 Items Current Time is 1 1 5 elapsed time alarm 0 0 10 RYEL RALOS RLOS RLOF SIGFRZ Enter any key to continue paging through the report press Escape to cancel and return to the menu The tasks described in this section all begin on the E1 Configuration menu The tasks as described so you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the E1 interface Type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the E1 Configuration menu Figure 4 30 E1 Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK El Configuration Menu KKEKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKKK KK KK KKK K KK KEK KKK KKK KKKK Select Frame CRC4 Mode Select Transmit Line Build Out Configure S Bits Configure Transmit Channels Configure Receive Channels Configure Clock Source Change to T1 Mode Display Physical Layer Stats and Alarm Log VorrdAUBWE Selecting Frame CRC4 Mode 1 Type 1 to select Frame CRC4 Mode and display the E1 Frame Mode menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Co
243. leting 179 DHCP Client Entry 175 DHCP Debugging 173 DHCP Entry details displaying 179 displaying settings 177 enabling and disabling 173 setup tasks basic 172 statistics displaying 178 DHCP Server Configuration menu 172 Diagnostics menu 260 diagnostics generally 260 dialup test 261 262 DLCI adding 94 deleting 96 displaying current 96 FRF 12 Fragmentation configuring 95 modifying 93 Receive CIR configuring 95 Transmit CIR configuring 94 DLCI Statistics report 218 DLCls configuring for Frame Relay generally 93 DNS cache and statistics displaying 115 DNS Client configuring 114 DNS Client menu 114 DNS Server IP address setting 114 timeout setting 114 DSLAMs supported 2 5 282 E E1 switching to 71 E1 Configuration menu 70 76 E1 Frame Mode menu 77 E1 interface configuring 76 echo cancellation setting 147 EIA 530 21 NetEngine IAD User Guide EIA 530 interface for USI 21 EmptyCells configuring 92 Encapsulation setting proprietary voice 84 Encapsulation setting in PVC 83 End to End Fragmentation Configuration menu 95 error dumps displaying 44 ESF Frame Mode 72 Ethernet connecting to IAD 20 full duplex option 35 Ethernet MAC address setting 43 Ethernet Port setting IP address 13 Ethernet port 4 7 Ethernet Statistics report 233 event log displaying 39 exit CLI command 245 F F4 OAM configuration displaying 91 F4 OAM Type Configuration menu 91 F4 OAM Type configuring 91 F4 OAM VPI configur
244. llocating ARP packets or ARP entries of the cache table Numbers of Destination IP address of packet are not found in the ARP cache table No of ARP packets discarded due to Destination IP address of the packet is not found in the ARP cache table Error in allocating ARP packets or ARP entries of the cache table NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 217 Interface Statistics Report To display the Interface Statistics report type I on the Interface Statistics menu The Interface Statistics report provides details about all packets sent and received on the selected interface Table 12 9 Interface Statistics Report Parameter Description Received Packet Information packets received No of packet received from this interface discarded for lack of Discarded received packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory or packet buffers discarded due to internal Discarded received packets due to internal errors software errors such as lack of packet buffer discarded for other Discarded received packets due to other reasons reasons such as lack of packet buffer Sent Packet Information packets sent No of packet sent from this interface discarded for lack of Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources resources kernel memory or packet buffers discarded due to internal Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors software errors such as lack of packet buffer discarded for other Discar
245. llowing and proceed to step 2 A To edit an existing filter type E to select Edit a filter of the chosen type B To insert a new filter type I to select Insert a new or buffered filter of the chosen type C To append a new filter at the bottom type A to select Append a new or buffered filter of the chosen type NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 122 2 Follow the IAD messages to enter values for the following parameters Table 5 1 Filter Parameters Parameter Filter state Filter action Filter protocol Filter Source IP Low Address Filter Source IP High Address Filter Source Port Low Filter Source Port High Filter Destination IP Low Address Filter Destination IP High Address Filter Destination Port Low Filter Destination Port High Description Idle Active Pass Discard IP ICMP IGMP TCP UDP IP address IP address Port number Port number IP address IP Address Port number Port number 3 When you enter the last parameter the IAD displays the summary information and saves the configuration The IAD displays the IP Filter Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish IP filter configuration Copying Filters for Editing To copy and edit filters first toggle input or output filters option T then type c on the IP Filtering Configuration menu t
246. lly configured IADs Once you have copied over the detault st file you cannot retrieve it You should consider copying the default st file to a safe location before replacing it Setting System Defaults You may set the IAD to boot from the modified configuration settings config st or boot from the factory supplied configuration file default st To choose follow these steps 1 Type D on the Utilities menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 39 2 The IAD displays the following menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK Select Default KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK 1 Custom Defaults 2 Factory Defaults Type 1 to set the config st config file as the boot file Type 2 to set the default st config file as the boot file 3 The IAD displays the following WARNING Saving System settings as Custom Defaults Press Y to Save Defaults gt Type Y to confirm the process 4 The IAD updates the setting and displays the Utility menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 to reboot with the new config file Saving System Settings To override the factory supplied default st config file with the current config st file follow these instructions 1 Type w on the Utilities menu The IAD displays the following WARNING Saving System settings as Custom Defaults Press Y to Save Defaults gt 2 Type y to delete the default st file and save the current configuration stored in config st as default st permanently
247. ltering Configuration menu and follow these steps 1 On the IP Filtering Configuration menu type z to select Delete all filters of the chosen type 2 The IAD displays a confirmation prompt Are you sure you want to delete all filters y n Type Y to confirm and press Enter 3 The IAD permanently removes all filters from the table and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish IP filter configuration Showing IP Filtering Statistics To show IP filtering statistics for this interface type s on the IP Filtering Configuration menu The IAD displays the total input and output data packets filtered Filter 0 output hits 0 Total packets filtered input 0 output 0 Press Y to clear the stats ESC to exit or any other key to display When you re done type Y to reset the statistics or press any other key to display the IP Filtering Configuration menu Clearing IP Filtering Statistics To reset the IP filtering statistics command type y on the IP Filtering Configuration menu The IAD resets the statistics to zero and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Config uring IP Header Compress ion IPHC 126 IPHC reduces the number of bytes transmitted across the WAN thus conserving bandwidth
248. ly disabled Enter new console timeout in minutes 0 to disable timeout 0 60 0 2 Type the timeout value a value between 0 60 minutes default 3 and press Enter Enter 0 zero to disable the timeout feature h CAUTION When the timeout value is set to zero sessions will stay alive indefinitely and may pose a security risk Quitting a terminal emulator session does not terminate the console port session You must log off before quitting to avoid creating a security risk Performing a Hard Reset When you perform a hard reset the IAD resets using all values set during the active session and reloads ACOS from flash memory To perform a hard reset follow these steps 1 Type R on the Utilities menu The IAD displays the following Sure you want to do a Hard Reset Y N gt 2 Enter y to immediately perform a hard reset and reload ACOS Managing Configuration Files Each IAD is shipped with a default configuration set in the file default st Once you make any changes to your IAD a new file is created to store the new configuration config st to preserve the default settings After you have configured the IAD for correct operation in a customer s premises the current system settings in the config st file may be saved as the default configuration file and you may choose to set the IAD to boot from this file each time it is reset You may also copy this file to a PC or TFTP server for downloading to other identica
249. m IP filtering Chapter 9 DHCP Server Configuration on page 171 walks you through the steps required to configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server and client Chapter 10 Multicast Configuration on page 181 describes the steps to configure the IAD to perform Network Address Translation NAT Chapter 11 NAT Configuration on page 189 describes the steps required to configure the IAD to perform Network Address Translation NAT Chapter 12 IAD Reports on page 201 describes each report you can run Chapter 13 Command Line Interface on page 243 describes how to enter and exit CLI mode and how to use each command in the command line interface You may use these commands instead of using the corresponding commands in the menu interface Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics on page 259 shows you how to troubleshoot and diagnose your IAD configuration when abnormal symptoms occur in the voice or computer network Chapter 15 Verification on page 271 describes the steps you take to verify normal operation once you ve installed connected and configured the IAD It also covers maintenance and how to display the current configuration Appendix A Menu Map on page 275 provides a graphic view of the IAD menu interface illustrating its navigation and organization Appendix B Country Codes on page 277 lists the specifications for each country code supported in the IAD Appendix C NetEngine IAD Specifi
250. n System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure NAT Telephony Clock Recovery Diagnostics Menu Command Line Interface Reset System Voice Path Configure GPHANHBZ VDOC MADUAWNEHE NOTE The user ID and password transmit as clear text which may be captured by unauthorized individuals If you are concerned with network security you may not want to use Telnet to configure the IAD T Using the The NetEngine IAD provides an ANSI terminal based menu interface for Menu system configuration and monitoring When you log in the IAD displays the Main menu Interface The commands displayed in some menus including the Main menu differ depending on the level at which you log in Figure 2 4 on page 18 displays the Main menu when you log in at the Supervisor security level Figure 2 5 on page 18 displays the Main menu when you log in as Network Administrator and Figure 2 6 on page 18 displays the Main menu when you log in as User NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide Figure 2 4 Main Menu for Supervisor 18 KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Main Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure WAN Configure LAN Configure SNMP Configure Login System Utilities Configure DHCP Server Configure Multicast Configure NAT Telephony Clock Recovery Diagnostics Menu Command Line Interface Reset System Voice Path Con
251. n support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to set and press Enter The IAD displays the RIP configuration and status of the slot and port you re setting and prompts for a new version Current RIP configuration for Slot 1 Port 1 is Disabled Enter RIP Version for Port 1 0 Disabled 1 Version 1 Broadcast 2 Version 2 Broadcast 3 Version 2 Multicast Type the option number of the version to set Setting the RIP version for this port is complete The IAD saves the settings and displays the Router Configuration menu Repeat these steps for each remaining port to set Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Managing Static and Default Routes 112 To create update and delete static and default routes type s on the Router Configuration menu The IAD displays the Router Modification menu which contains commands to manage the IAD s route table Figure 5 3 Router Modification Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Router Modification Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK A Add a Static Route Remove a Route Add Change the Default Route Remove the Default Route Display Route Table OHH DW The tasks in this section originate at the Router Modification menu Type the option
252. nd displays the Multicast Configuration menu 6 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration Removing a Multicast Routing Source Displaying the Multicast Routing Source 185 Type R to remove a Multicast Routing Source 1 The IAD displays the IP address prompt Enter IP address for the Source Type the source IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompt Enter subnet mask for the source 2592992990 gt Type the new subnet address and press Enter The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the interface The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to delete and press Enter The IAD The IAD permanently removes the multicast routing source from the Multicast Routing Source Table and displays the Multicast Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Type s to display the Multicast Routing Source The IAD displays the Multicast Routing Source Table NETWORK ADDRESS NETMASK INCOM
253. nderrun Description The status of this D Channel Active The connection is up Inactive The connection is down No of BRI frames received No of BRI frames sent No of Overrun errors A consequence of data arriving faster than it can be consumed No of invalid frames received Received Overrun Discarded received packets due to the internal Received Packet Ring Pool are full so that could not process any incoming packets No of CRC errors received No of Aborted of packets received Transmitted Underrun Discarded transmitted packets due to there are no packets waiting in the Transmitted Packet Ring Buffer No of transmitted collision Current status for the B channel connection No of packets received No of packets sent No of discarded transmitted packets Jitter Buffer Overruns There is on available packet buffer from the Transmitted Packet Buffer Pool No of Underrun occurs There is no waiting packets in the Transmitted packet Pool buffer Clearing Media Statistics To clear network statistics type z on the Network Statistics menu The IAD displays the Clear Network Statistics menu Figure 12 7 Clear Network Statistics Menu sample 1 Clear 2 Clear F Clear S Clear G2237 ADSL Statistics ATM Statistics Frame Relay DLCI Serial Statistics Statistics The statistics options shown depend on the ports and configuration of the IAD To permanently reset statisti
254. ne IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 147 Setting Debug Mode Configur ing Echo Cancell ation Option M Set Debug Mode is reserved for Verilink network engineers To set echo cancellation default settings type E to display the Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configuration menu Figure 7 9 Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configuration Menu KKEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Echo Cancellation Default Settings Configure Menu KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKKKK 1 Set Echo Cancellation default setting for all ports 2 Display current Echo Cancellation default settings 3 Configure Echo Cancellation default setting per port Type the option for the task to perform Proceed to the appropriate section Enabling and Disabling Echo Cancellation Globally 1 Type 1 to enable or disable echo cancellation for all ports 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable echo cancellation for all ports or D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration Displaying Echo Cancellation Settings Type 2 to display the echo cancellation setting on each port The IAD displays the following report 1 DISABLED 2 ENABLED 3 DISABLED 4 DISABLED Press any key to return to the Echo Cancellation
255. network booting by a network node to determine the IP address of its Ethernet interfaces DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier Value that specifies a PVC or SVC in a Frame Relay network In the basic Frame Relay specification DLCls are locally significant connected devices might use different values to specify the same connection In the LMI extended specification DLCls are globally significant DLCls specify individual end devices E1 Network connection with a capacity of 2 048 divided into 32 separate channels or DSOs EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable read only Memory Nonvolatile memory chips that can be erased using electrical signals and reprogrammed Ethernet Physical connection commonly used for LANs Runs over a variety of cable types and provides theoretical bandwidth of 10 or 100 Mbps Invented by Xerox Corporation and developed jointly with Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation Fast Ethernet Any of a number of 100 Mbps Ethernet specifications Frame Relay A network interface providing high speed packet transmission with minimum delay Uses variable length packets called frames Contrast with packet Full Duplex Capable of handling simultaneous data transmission between a sending station and a receiving station ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol Internet protocol that reports errors and provides other information relevant to IP packet processing such as routing information NetEngine IAD
256. nfiguration 77 Figure 4 31 E1 Configuration menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKK KKK Select El Frame Mode KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK El Frame Mode FAS FAS FAS CRC4 Enabled Multi Frame CAS Multi Frame CAS CRC4 Enabled W O He 3 4 Type the option to set the frame mode The IAD saves the configuration resets the interface and displays the menu The menu and reset messages may conflict press any key to refresh the menu Press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish E1 configuration Setting Line Build Out 1 Type 3 Select Transmit Line Build Out to display the Line Build Out menu Figure 4 32 Select Line Build Out Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Select Line Build Out Line Build Out Is 0 dB 1 O dB 2e 125 OB 3 4 15 dB 22 5 dB 2 3 4 Type the option to select the line build out decibel setting The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish E1 configuration Configuring S Bits The E1 Configuration menu displays 1 2 Type 4 to select Configure S Bits The IAD displa
257. ng on the IAD Figure 2 1 Main Menu KKEKEKKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKKEKK Main Menu KKEKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KEKE 1 Reports Menu 2 Configure IP Router 3 Configure Bridge 5 Configure WAN 6 Configure LAN 7 Configure SNMP 8 Configure Login 9 System Utilities D Configure DHCP Server M Configure Multicast N Configure NAT Options E A and O T Telephony Clock Recovery vary depending on the Z Diagnostics Menu voice gateway selected C Command Line Interface in the Voice Path R Reset System Configure command P Voice Path Configure E A O CopperCom Call Control Setting the Ethernet Port IP Address Before you configure the Ethernet IP address you should know the IP address and subnet mask that is to be assigned to this port It may be displayed on the work order or you may obtain or determine the appropriate IP address by consulting with the network administrator The IAD is shipped with a null IP address and subnet mask To configure a port IP address 1 On the Main menu type 2 to select Configure IP Router 2 The IAD displays the Router Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide 14 Figure 2 2 Router Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Router Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Configure Port IP Address Unconfigure Port IP Address Configure Port Max Transmission
258. ng proper setup page 22 C e A e a A E ae e e e g In most installations you ll proceed through these topics in order If your situation varies complete information on installation connection configuration and troubleshooting is contained in the reference chapters following this chapter NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide Unpacking the IAD Installing the IAD Each IAD is packed and shipped in a durable container If you haven t already done so open the container and unpack the IAD Carefully remove the IAD from the package and packing material IAD Package Components Each IAD is shipped with the components listed below As you unpack them note their condition and identity and compare the list to the packing list in the package AC power adapter and cord 6 feet long or AC power cord Agency Compliance information sheet Ethernet cable straight through 7 feet long WAN cable varies by interface 7 feet long If you note any visible damage or components are missing notify the shipping company immediately to make a damage claim Contact the company from which the IAD was purchased Verilink or an authorized distributor to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA for return of damaged equipment or to order missing components
259. ngs Setting Value Setting Value Bits per second 19 200 Stop bits 1 Data bits 8 Flow control None Parity None Emulation ANSI or VT100 4 Press Enter The IAD displays the log in message Enter Login ID gt NOTE If the IAD does not respond make sure the IAD is powered up check the cable and connections and review the settings 5 Type the default supervisor level user ID Supervisor or your user ID if changed and press Enter Note that both the user ID and password are case sensitive Table 2 2 below lists the default user IDs and passwords Table 2 2 Default IAD User IDs and Passwords Security Level User ID Password User lt enter gt lt Enter gt Network NetMan lt Enter gt Administrator Supervisor Supervisor supervisor For information on security levels and user ID and password management see IAD Security on page 24 6 The IAD displays the password message Enter Password gt NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide 13 7 Type the default password supervisor or your password if different and press Enter 8 If log in is not successful the IAD displays the following message Invalid UserID or Password Try again Press any key to continue 9 Press any key and repeat the log in sequence If you cannot log in call your support provider for assistance When you first log in the IAD displays the Main menu The menu may vary dependi
260. nnel Configuration menu 74 Compander Mode Selection 145 CopperCom Call Control 155 CopperCom Configuration 156 Country Mode Selection 150 Debug 43 Derived Timing 48 DHCP Relay 117 DHCP Server Configuration 172 Diagnostics 260 DNS Client 114 E1 Configuration 70 76 E1 Frame Mode 77 End to End Fragmentation Configuration 95 F4 OAM Type Configuration 91 File System 41 File Transfer 34 45 Frame Relay Congestion Configuration 100 Frame Relay DLCI Configuration 93 Frame Relay DLCI Options 94 Frame Relay Encapsulation Configuration 94 Frame Relay Fragmentation Configuration 97 Frame Relay FRF 12 Configuration 98 Frame Relay Maintenance Protocol 100 Frame Relay Options 97 G2237 xDSL Configuration 60 G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration 69 Ground Start OHT Mode Selection 145 IP Filtering Configuration 119 IPCP IP Address Type 86 Line Build Out 73 77 Loop Gain 148 Loop Start Idle Voltage Selection 146 Loopback Configuration 74 main 13 MGCP NCS Management Menu 151 Multicast Configuration 182 Multicast Routing Source 183 NAT Configuration 190 NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration 192 POTS Diagnostics 260 Quick Configuration 102 Reports 202 Router Configuration 14 105 Router Modification 112 S Bits 78 SDSL Configuration 65 SDSL Diagnostics 265 Select Tx Clock Source 75 SLIC Control Mode Selection 144 SNMP configuration 29 Start Mode Selection 143 NetEngine IAD User Guide T1 Configuration 70 72 T1 Frame Mode 72 TFTP Server 47 T
261. nown the ARP broadcast request is sent to all interfaces The interface that receives the reply is used to send the actual IP packet NOTE When using IP Over Bridging with CopperMountain HDIA or CopperVPN the default route for the IP interface should be specified using the IP address of the router rather than a WAN port number Enabling or Disabling Bridging Globally To enable or disable bridging globally 1 On the Main menu type G to select Enable Disable Bridging Globally 2 The IAD displays the status of bridging and a prompt NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration 3 4 5 133 Bridging is globally DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable bridging globally or D to disable it globally The IAD saves the configuration and displays the Bridge Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Bridge Configuration menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration Enabling or Disabling Bridging by Port To enable or disable bridging by port 1 2 10 11 12 Type P on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Enable Disable Bridging by Port The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port for which you want to enable bridging If more than one interface is con
262. nterface page 61 Configuring the SDSL Interface page 65 Configuring the ADSL Interface page 69 6200 Setting the Interface to T1 or E1 page 70 Configuring the T1 Interface page 72 Configuring the E1 Interface page 76 Configuring ATM PVCs page 81 Configuring ATM Options page 90 Configuring Frame Relay DLCls page 93 Configuring Frame Relay Options page 97 6300 Using the Quick Configure Option page 102 NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input it displays the default or current value in parentheses To conveniently accept this value just press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Basic WAN Setup Tasks 52 To set up the IAD for voice and data operation you must perform at least these basic tasks Select ATM or Frame Relay as the datalink protocol page 56 For ATM protocol configure ATM PVCs page 81 and ATM options page 90 For Frame Relay protocol configure Frame Relay DLCls page 93 and Configure Frame Relay options page 97 Configure the WAN interface for your IAD following For channelized T1 set up voice and data circuits page 58 Configure the voice path Voice Path Configuration on page 139 ee 6 OO Use the flowcharts below to plan your tasks for configuring either xDSL or T1 E1 based on your wide area networking requirements Figure 4 1 xDSL WAN Configuration Flowchart SDSL Module factory configuration D
263. nterface for the Ethernet address To display information about mappings between Ethernet addresses and devices connected to the LAN type B on the Reports Menu The IAD displays the following information Table 12 28 Bridge Forwarding Database Report Parameter Ethernet Address Interface Description Ethernet address of the device assigned by the manufacturer Interface for the Ethernet address NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Bridge Status Report PPP Authorizati on Entries Report 239 Table 12 28 Bridge Forwarding Database Report Parameter Description Port Port for the Ethernet interface Timer No of seconds until this entry deletes from the database The time counts down from the bridge database aging time value in one second intervals at zero the entry deletes from the database You must enable bridging for this table to display For more information on enabling bridging see Bridge Configuration on page 129 To display information about bridging type s on the Reports Menu The IAD displays a record for each interface Table 12 29 Bridge Status Report Parameter Description Interface interface for the active slot for bridging Port port for the preceding interface Spanning Tree Protocol STP enabled disabled State Spanning tree state disabled blocking listening learning forwarding Root root port for the bridge yes no Designated designated port
264. nu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 87 Figure 4 47 ATM PCR Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK ATM Peak Cell Rate PCR Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK KEK Current line speed for this interface is 1544000 bps Please type a PCR value or Press ENTER to accept allowed maximum PCR value for this line speed Enter Peak Cell Rate PCR 3641 cells per second Type the PCR value or press Enter to set the PCR to the maximum rate for the current line speed 10 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM PVC Configuration menu Setting up AAL1 CES 1 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile Format menu Figure 4 48 AAL2 Audio Profile Format Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK AAL2 Audio Profile Format KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE Current Audio Profile Format NONE Te BEG 2 ATM Forum To select ITU type 1 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 Audio Profile menu with available options Figure 4 49 AAL2 Audio Profile Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK AAL2 Audio Profile KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK Gl Current Audio Profile NONI 1 ITU 1 40 octets G 711 64 3 The IAD displays the Peak Cell Rate Configuration menu Figure 4 50 ATM PCR Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ATM Peak Cell Rate PC
265. nu where you may continue with other ATM tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish ATM configuration Configuring the F4 OAM VPI One one F4 OAM VPI may be configured at a time When you are configuring an F4 OAM VPI if one is not configured the IAD displays the message F4 OAM not configured otherwise the current configuration is displayed To configure the F4 OAM VPI 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 2 to select Configure F4 OAM VPI NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 91 This value must match one of the WAN PVCs For more information see Configuring ATM PVCs on page 81 2 The IAD displays the status and a prompt F4 End to end OAM VPI 0O Enter Virtual Port Identifier VPI Type the VPI on which to configure F4 OAM 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM Configuration menu where you may continue with other ATM tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish ATM configuration Configuring the F4 OAM Type To configure the F4 OAM type 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 3 to select Configure F4 OAM Type The IAD displays this menu Figure 4 55 ATM Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK F4 OAM Type Configuration Menu KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK 0 None 4 F4 End to End OAM Type 0 to set F4 OAM to none or type 4 to set for End to End OAM 2 The IAD saves the configuration and displ
266. o abort When you proceed the IAD displays the current MAC address for the Ethernet port and prompts for a new one Current Ethernet Address 00 E0 75 1C 0E 18 New MAC Address RSA LS SIN Sh Re 3 Type the new MAC address Press Escape any time to abort this task 4 Reset the IAD page 15 for the new MAC address to take effect Enabling and Disabling PPP Debug Mode When you enable PPP debugging the IAD displays PPP debug messages To enable or disable PPP debugging follow these steps 1 Type E on the Debug menu The IAD displays the PPP debug status PPP Debug Mode is currently DISABLED 2 Type E to enable PPP debugging or type D to disable it The IAD sets PPP debug mode to the setting you entered and displays the Debug menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 44 Enabling and Disabling STP Debug Mode When you enable STP debugging the IAD displays STP debug messages To enable or disable STP debugging follow these steps 1 Type s on the Debug menu The IAD displays the STP debug status STP Debug Mode is currently DISABLED 2 Type E to enable STP debugging or type D to disable it The IAD sets STP debug mode to the setting you entered and displays the Debug menu Enabling and Disabling DHCP Client Debug Mode When you enable DHCP Client debugging the IAD displays DHCP Client debug messages To enable or disable DHCP Client debugging follow these steps 1 Type I on the Debug menu Th
267. o configure some ports for routing and some ports for bridging For example you might set up PPP for Internet connections using routing and set up a management connection using bridging A router is a network layer device that uses one or more metrics to determine the optimal path along which network traffic should be forwarded Routers forward packets from one network to another based on network layer information A router generally improves overall efficiency for a complex network but a bridge provides better speed and flexibility for the overall network This chapter contains the following topics Basic Router Setup Tasks page 104 Using the Router Configuration menu page 105 Configuring an IP Address page 106 Configuring Port Maximum Transmission Units page 109 Adding and Removing Static Routes page 112 Enabling and Disabling RIP page 110 Configuring RIP Version by Port page 111 Configuring RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port page 110 Configuring DNS Client page 114 Configuring DHCP Client page 114 Configuring DHCP Relay page 117 Configuring Telnet Server Port page 119 Configuring IP Filtering page 119 Configuring IP Header Compression page 126 Configuring LAN IP Broadcast Destination page 127 Displaying the Route Table page 127 L e E E E E aE A aE a i A e E Ae d NOTE When the IAD prompts you for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just
268. o display the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu 2 F c Figure 5 7 IP Filtering Copy to Buffer Menu IP Filter Copy to KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK Buffer Menu KKEKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK EKK C Copy a filter of the chosen type to the buffer D Display the filter in the copy buffer Edit the filter in the copy buffer X Delete the filter from the copy buffer NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 123 Copying a Filter To copy a filter to the filter buffer for viewing or editing follow these steps 1 On the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu type c to select Copy a filter of the chosen type to the buffer 2 The IAD displays the filter table for this interface and prompts for a filter number T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 168 192 1 10 255 255 255 25 5 TCP OH 0 65535 92 100 1 1 255 255 255 255 0 Type the filter number and press Enter 3 The IAD copies the filter to the filter buffer and displays the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu Displaying a Filter in the Buffer To display filter details follow these steps 1 On the IP Filter Copy to Buffer menu type D to the filter currently stored in the buffer 2 The IAD displays the filter Table 5 2 on page 123 T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state a
269. o display the PVC Statistics Reports type A on the Interface Statistics menu This option is only displayed when ATM is selected as the data link protocol Several associated reports are available depending on the specification of the PVC OR A a a E g AAL1 CPCS Statistics Report page 220 AAL2 page 221 Cumulative CPCS 2 page 222 Common AAL page 222 IP Header Compression page 224 PPP page 225 AAL1 CPCS Statistics Report This PVC Report displays when an AAL1 LES PVC is configured Table 12 12 AAL1 CPCS Statistics Report Parameter Reass Cells Tx Cells Hdr Errors Ptr Reframes Ptr Parity Errors Ptr Errors Rx Seq Errors Lost Cells Misinserted Cells CellLossStatus Description Total Cells received Total Cell sent The header of the Cell is incorrect such as wrong Sequence Segment Number SN SNP Number AAL1 Pointer Reframes cells Value in CSI field of the header is incorrect Value of Pointer field in the header is incorrect Sequence number is incorrect for cells received No of lost cells base on current sequence number No of mis inserted cells the sequence number of the cell is out of sequence 2 Current Status is out of sequence 1 Current Status has no problem NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 221 AAL2 Statistics Report This PVC Report displays when an AAL2 LES PVC is configured Table 12 13 Common CPCS 2 Statistics Report Parameter Transmit overflows
270. o return to the ATM PVC Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 90 Configuring To configure ATM options type 4 to display the ATM Configuration menu ATM Figure 4 54 ATM Configuration Menu Options KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ATM Config Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Configure Payload Scrambling Configure F4 OAM VPI Configure F4 OAM Type Display F4 OAM Configuration Send OAM Loopback Configure EmptyCells DOB WN EH To perform these tasks type the option and proceed to the corresponding section The tasks in this section are described beginning at the ATM Configuration menu Configuring Payload Scrambling following Configuring F4 OAM VPI page 90 Configuring F4 OAM Type page 91 Displaying F4 OAM Configuration page 91 Sending OAM Loopback page 91 Configuring EmptyCells page 92 CR a a A E d Configuring Payload Scrambling You must enable payload scrambling which is disabled by default for the IAD to connect to a DSLAM that uses payload scrambling To enable or disable payload scrambling 1 On the ATM Configuration menu type 1 to select Configure Payload Scrambling 2 The IAD displays the status and a prompt Payload scrambling is DISABLE Enter E to Enable D to Disable To enable payload scrambling type E or type D to disable payload scrambling 3 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the ATM Configuration me
271. ompt for the IP address of the TFTP server Enter ip address of TFTP server gt Type the IP address of the TFTP server and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the following prompt for the file name to transfer NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 4 5 6 47 Type the name of the file and press Enter To exit without transferring the file press Escape or Enter without typing the file name When XMODEM is selected if the file is not located the IAD prompts you for the file transfer speed The IAD transfers the file via TFTP or XMODEM Reset the IAD page 15 to utilize the new file If you transfer acos bin using this option perform a hard reset page 38 Using the TFTP Server Menu Type T to enable and disable read access write access and console 0 utput Figure 3 12 TFTP Server Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KR KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKK TFTP Server Menu KEKE K KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KEK Read access enabled Write access disabled Console output disabled R Toggle Read Access W Toggle Write Access Q Toggle Console Output The IAD displays the current settings directly below the menu heading To successively enable or disable access or output execute the option again The IAD saves the configuration and displays the menu When the options a re set correctly reset the IAD for the changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide
272. onds CRC Count LOSW Defect Count FEBE Count Tip Ring Transmit Power Receiver Gain GSHDSL Remote Country Code Remote Provider Code Description Current operation state Current start progress Total Operation Time in Seconds No of times modem has come up No of SNR Signal to Noise Ration received No of mean SQ error used to compute received signal to noise ratio No of the Initial Received SNR Signal to Noise Ration Current level of Loop Attenuation Actual PSD mask is used for the line code comparison It is acknowledged that an optimized PSD mask can be decided only after line code decision is made The transmit power back off of remote HTU Current framer synchronization status In Sync Out of Sync Current status of LOSW Loss of Sync Defect ON OFF Total seconds of statistics gathering Total errored seconds received of CRC and LOSW errors found No of CRC errors near end received No of LOSW Defect Loss of Sync Defect errors received No of Far End Block Error Count far end Current status of Tip Ring Normal Reserved Nominal transmit power Current no of total receiver gain Current Remote Country Code Current Provider Code NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 232 Table 12 21 G2237 xDSL Statistics Report Parameter H DSL2 Remote HDSL2 Version Remote Country Code Provider Code Remote Vendor Data Low Remote Vendor Data Hi Data Mode H
273. onfiguration NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 143 Displaying Jitter Delay Setting Start Mode To display the current jitter delay value type D on the Voice Configuration menu The IAD displays the current value Jitter Delay 12 ms Press any key to display the Voice Configuration menu and continue To set start mode for POTS only type s on the Voice Configuration menu to display the Start Mode Selection menu Figure 7 4 Start Mode Selection Menu KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Start Mode Selection KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KKKKKKE KK KK KKK Set All Ports to Loop Start Set All Ports to Ground Start Display Start Mode Configure Individual Port W V FP Type the option for the task to perform Proceed to the appropriate section Setting All Ports to Loop Start 1 Type 1 to select Set All Ports to Loop Start 2 The IAD sets all ports to Loop Start and saves the configuration 3 Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu 4 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configuration 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Setting All Ports to Ground Start 1 Type 2 to select Set All Ports to Ground Start 2 The IAD sets all ports to Ground Start and saves the configuration 3 Press any key to return to the Start Mode Selection menu 4 Press Escape to continue with other voice path configur
274. onfigure the voice path page 139 SDSL with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 56 Configure SDSL page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 ORO a os A 6300 4 To configure the physical interface of the 6300 IADs you may mer er 6400 8 also use the Quick Configuration command For more information see Quick Configuration on page 102 6504 G SHDSL with ATM rine Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 56 Configure G SHDSL page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 SDSL with ATM Set the datalink protocol to ATM page 58 Configure SDSL page 69 Configure PVCs page 81 Configure ATM page 90 Configure the voice path page 139 oe ONS aron gt NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Using the WAN Config uration Menu T Selecting the Datalink Protocol 56 Configuring the IAD for data involves several tasks Tasks in this chapter are described beginning at the WAN Configuration menu which varies based on the WAN interface and datalink protocol Figure 4 3 WAN Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK Configuring T1 El E 2 3 Configure DLCIs 4 The IAD displays the physical interface in this status message WAN Configuration Menu Configure Datalink Protocol
275. onfiguring a RADIUS server see RADIUS Server Settings on page 27 Running Telnet Before you use Telnet to log in to the IAD make sure that the IAD and your PC are connected to the same network via straight through Ethernet cables or directly connected via a cross over cable and you know the IP address of the IAD Both devices must be on the same subnet Follow these steps to log in 1 Run Telnet on your PC 2 Type the IP address of the Ethernet port page 13 click Connect and then press Enter to gain the attention of the IAD 3 The IAD responds by displaying the log in message Enter Login ID gt 4 Type your user ID and press Enter NOTE After a period of inactivity three minutes by default the IAD automatically terminates console based and Telnet sessions to maintain security To change this value see Configuring the Console Timeout Period on page 38 Default user IDs and passwords are listed in Table 2 2 on page 12 For information on security levels and user ID and password management see IAD Security on page 24 5 The IAD displays the password message Enter Password gt m NetEngine IAD User Guide Quick Start Guide 17 4 Type your password and press Enter to display the Main menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Main Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Reports Menu Configure IP Router Configure Bridge Configure WAN Configure LAN Configure SNMP Configure Logi
276. or Pinouts Connector This appendix specifies pinouts for each connector on the IAD Pinouts Table D 1 RS 232 DB 9 Console Port Pin Assignments Pin Signal 1 Ground 2 Tx Data 3 Rx Data Table D 2 RJ11 POTS Port Pin Assignments Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Line Line Tip Ring Tip Ring 1 3 4 5 2 5 2 3 4 6 2 5 3 3 4 7 2 5 4 3 4 8 2 5 Table D 3 RJ45 BRI ISDN SO Port Pin Assignments Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Line Line Tip Ring Tip Ring 1 3 4 5 2 5 2 3 4 6 2 5 3 3 4 7 2 5 4 3 4 8 2 5 NetEngine IAD User Guide Connector Pinouts 290 Table D 4 10BaseT Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 TX 5 NC 2 Tx 6 Rx 3 Rx 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC Table D 5 100BaseT Connector Pin Assignments RJ48 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 TX 5 NC 2 Tx 6 Rx 3 Rx 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC Table D 6 ADSL SDSL Connector Pin Assignments RJ45 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 N C 3 Ring 2 Tip 4 N C Table D 7 G SHDSL Port Pin Assignments RJ11 Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Line Line Tip Ring Tip Ring 1 3 5 2 5 2 3 4 6 2 5 3 3 4 7 2 5 4 3 4 8 2 5 NetEngine IAD User Guide Connector Pinouts Table D 8 T1 E1 Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal 1 Rx Ring 2 Rx Tip 3 NC 4 Tx Tip Pin ON OA Signal Tx Ring NC NC NC 291 Table D 9 USI Port for RS 530 V 35 and RS 449 Signal Shield Ground Transmit Data A Rece
277. or configuring the SDSL WAN interface on the 6300 8 6300 4 6300 8 or 7316 7316 Figure 4 16 SDSL Configuration Menu KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK SDSL Configuration KKEKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK K KK KK KKK KK KKK Configuring SDSL Current SDSL configuration CPE AUTO Cycle Bit Order Sign Mag SPEED 1152 Kbps Conexant AutoBaud Disabled Toggle SDSL Mode CO or CPE Set SDSL Speed to Auto Cycle Nokia Set SDSL Speed to Auto Sense Coppermountain Enable Disable Conexant AutoBaud Mode Set SDSL Sync Delay Lucent Set SDSL to AccessLan CPE Mode Set SDSL for IMAS DSLAM Nortel Set SDSL Speed Manually SDSL Interface Mode Bit Order Enable Disable SDSL AutoBaud Debug Messages Enable Disable SDSL Debug Messages Enable Disable Sync Msgs Configure SDSL Auto Cycle Speed Table Preactivation Debug Mode POKUPWOMAINDUABRWNHE Selecting CPE or CO Mode 1 Type 1 to display the Configure CPE CO Mode menu Figure 4 17 Configure CPE CO Mode menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK Configure CPE CO Mode KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KKK Current Mode CPE 1 CPE Zz CO 2 Type 1 to select CPE or type 2 to select CO 3 The IAD sets the mode and displays the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 66 Setting Auto Cycle Nokia DSLAM Type 2 to set the SDSL speed to Auto Cycl
278. ort Configure ISDN Port Load Variant Unload Variant Save Variant Delete Saved Variant Restart Interface Shut Down Interface ADxKXSEaQGQFHUVY NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 166 NOTE T Use of commands in the Variant Interface Management menu is reserved for use by Verilink network engineers only Debugging for AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Type D to display the Debugging menu Figure 7 29 AAL2 LES CCS ELCP Debugging Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Debugging KKEKKKKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KK KK KKK D Set Debugging Options S Display V5 FSM States Setting Debugging Options Type D to display debugging information for AAL2 LES CCS ELCP and set debugging options NOTE m The use of these debugging options is reserved for Verilink network engineers only Enabling debug options may significantly affect IAD performance Displaying V5 FSM States Type s to display V5 FSM states PSTN FSM States AN side L3 Signaling Port Control Port Status AN6 port blockedANO out of serviceAN1 0 blocked AN6 port blockedANO out of serviceAN1 0 blocked 1 2 3 AN6 port blockedANO out of serviceAN1 0 blocked SABNE spart biockedini out or oervi ceni 0rblock d Viewing AAL2 LES Statistics Type s to display the AAL2 Channel Statistics menu Figure 7 30 AAL2 Channel Statistics Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK
279. ound Start OHT Mode Selection menu 145 H hard reset conducting 38 hotline test 261 l IAD clearance requirements 10 components 10 configuration basic steps 20 connecting systems 20 connecting toa PC 11 installing 10 obtaining Return Material Authorization for 10 package components 10 powering up 12 providing password security for 24 reporting damage to 10 resetting 15 saving system settings 39 setting system defaults 38 System Utilities 36 troubleshooting 266 267 unpacking 10 upgrading system 31 upgrading to new system 33 verifying operation 271 verifying software version 34 IAD system updating 46 ICMP Statistics report 206 idle voltage mode setting 146 IGMP group displaying 186 IGMP querier displaying multicast IGMP querier displaying 186 IGMP Statistics report 208 IMAS 67 Industry Canada Notice xvii Innovia 282 supported DSLAM 282 installing the IAD 10 Interface Statistics report 217 interface statistics reports 215 IP address configuring 106 unconfiguring 108 verifying on IAD 49 verifying on pc 49 NetEngine IAD User Guide IP filtering 169 filter parameters 122 filter deleting 124 filter details 123 filters deleting by type 125 filters displaying 121 filters editing 124 filters enabling or disabling 120 filters managing 121 setting a port for 120 statistics clearing 125 statistics displaying 125 IP Filtering Configuration menu 119 IP filtering configuring 119 IP Header Compression confi
280. ous 2 level transmission Continuous 4 level transmission Digital Far Loopback Foes ND To perform a type of transmission type the option For option P select the level to begin the transmission Press any key to terminate the test NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 266 ISDN BRI Diagnostics Type B to perform BRI Diagnostics 6104 The BRI diagnostics menu for ISDN testing is available on the 6504i two ISDN based IADS 6104i and 6504i The IAD displays the BRI Diagnostics menu Figure 14 4 BRI Diagnostics Menu KIRK KR KK KK KK KK KK KK RK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK RE BRI Diagnostics Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK K KK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Select BRI Line Send D Channel Test Pattern Enable Internal Digital Loop Enable Internal Analog Loop Enable Remote Loop Enable SSP Enable SCP Disable All Test Modes Send Bl Channel Test Pattern Send B2 Channel Test Pattern Enable Disable BRI L1 debug messag Enable Disable BRI Dch debug message Disable BRI PS Enable BRI PS Activate L1 Deactivate Ll Manufacture Loop Back Test Burning Loop Back Test AER QAFWUADWDPWANDATWNEO Before conducting any test or enabling an option type O to select the BRI line to on which to operate 1 4 Next perform the test or enable disable options by typing the option When testing is complete type 8 to disable all test modes NetEngine IAD User G
281. out RFC 1631 Port Translation exported services multiNAT up to 16 public IP addresses Multi level userID and password protection Radius client support RFC 2865 Table C 9 6108 6104i 6504i and 6504 8 Environmental and Physical Specifications Interface Power Supply Power Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Humidity Safety Emissions LEDs Physical Dimensions Weight Mounting Description External 120VAC 60 Hz or 220 240VAC 50 Hz 6108 6504 8 9 W nominal 16 W maximum 6104i 6504i 16 W nominal 16 W max 0Cto40C 10Cto 70C 5 90 non condensing humidity UL 60950 Third Edition CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 95 EN 60950 2000 IEC 60950 1999 6108 6504 8 FCC Part 15 Class A EN55022 EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 Voice WAN link LAN Rx LAN Tx Power LX Wx H 11 8 X 8 3 X 1 8 1 8 Ibs Stackable and wall mountable Table C 10 6000 Network Interfaces Interface 10 100BaseT Ethernet xDSL ADSL IAD Description Shielded RJ 45 6500 6100 NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 7000 Family 286 Table C 10 6000 Network Interfaces Interface SDSL T1 E1 Voice Ports IAD Description 6300 2 Wire SDSL shielded RJ 11 connector Symmetrical data rates from 144 Kbps to 2 3 Mbps in increments of 8 Kbps Transmission range up to 25 000 feet 6200 1 544 2 048 Mbps Shielded RJ 48 connector 4 or 8 Port
282. port follow these steps 1 Type U on the Utilities menu and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the following Enter 1 to enable a USI module as a uart interface on slot 1 Enter 0 to make a USI module a RS530 interface on any slot gt current 0 3 Type 1 to select V 35 Type 0 to select RS 530 4 Reset the IAD page 15 to use the new USI settings Voltage levels for V 35 and RS 530 are different Be sure to use the appropriate cable for the protocol you choose Configuring the Console Baud Rate To set the console port baud rate for connecting to Hyperterminal via a serial cable follow these steps 1 Type z on the Utilities menu to display the following menu Current Console Baud Rate is 19200 Enter New Console Baud Rate Unset use Default 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 OP wWNrR 2 Type 0 to reset the baud rate to the default 19200 bps or select a specific baud rate and press Enter 3 Reset the IAD page 15 to use the new console port settings Be sure the terminal settings are the same as the console port settings NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 38 Configuring the Console Timeout Period To maintain security you can set the amount of time a console or Telnet session remains alive before termination due to inactivity To set the timeout period follow these steps 1 Type v on the Utilities menu to display this message and prompt Console timeout is current
283. ption does not apply to an ISDN based IAD To set a specific country mode type c to display the Country Mode Selection menu which contains commands to set the base country Specifications for each country code includes minimum and maximum flash hook ring frequency receive and transmit gain reference or input impedance and load impedance settings These specifications are listed in Appendix B Country Codes on page 277 When you select a specific country mode the values are set automatically 6108 Ring frequency and impedance settings are automatically 6504 applied to the 6108 6504 and 6508 6508 Figure 7 11 Country Mode Selection Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Country Mode Selection KKEKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KK Current Country Name is ETSI Generic Current Country Mode is Europe A Australia Complex Impedanc B ETSI Generic C United States of America 1 Type the letter corresponding to the country mode you want to set 2 The IAD saves the mode you ve selected and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the Voice Configuration menu and continue with other voice path configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration NOTE To add support for any of the countries regions listed above but not displayed in the Country Mode Selection menu contact your service provider to obtain the file NetEngine IAD User Guide
284. r IP address of the DNS server current timeout value in seconds 5 to 20 loaded program files loaded support files ADSL SDSL GSHDSL T1 E1 Ethernet Status enabled disabled online offline NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 204 Table 12 1 Current Configuration Report Parameter WAN DataLink Protocol xDSL type Firmware Version ADSL Standard for Startup SDSL Mode Mode Line Rate Payload Scrambling Frame Relay Management RIP Poisoned Reverse Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Client Bridging Spanning Tree Port Priority Path Cost T1 E1 Only T1 Frame Mode E1 Frame Mode Binary 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS Line Build Out Tx Clock Source Tx Channels Enabled Rx Channels Enabled HDB3 coding Payload Scrambling Port Sa4 Bit Sad Bit Sa Bit Sa7 Bit Description Totally Transparent Raw HDLC Cisco compatible HDLC IP Plus compatible HDLC PPP over Raw HDLC ATM Frame Relay G SHDSL Annex A U S GSHDSL Annex B Europe SDSL version of firmware T1 413 GLITE GDMT Alcatel 1 4 Multi Mode ADI ALCATEL Customer Premises Equipment CPE or Central Office CO CPE or CO Auto Fixed 1152 Kbps 768 Kbps 384 Kbps 192 Kbps 2320 Kbps or manually set enabled disabled ATM only maintenance protocol Frame Relay only enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled
285. r Guide NAT Configuration Configuring NAT Local Server 192 To configure the NAT local server entry follow these steps 1 2 4 Type N on the NAT Configuration menu to select Configure NAT Local Server Entry The IAD displays the following Enter NAT Local Server Entry to Configure 1 10 1 Type the number of the local server entry and press Enter The IAD displays the current IP address and prompts for a new one Current NAT Local Server Translated IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter new NAT Local Server Translated IP address Type the local server translated IP address and press Enter The IAD displays the Protocol Configuration menu Figure 11 2 NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration Menu kkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxk xkxk xkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxk kxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk kxx k KKKEKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKK Current NAT Local Server Protocol is TCP NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration Menu 1 TCP 2 UDP 3 ESP IPSec 4 AH IPSec 5 Both TCP and UDP The protocol may be unknown or it may be set Type the option number of the protocol usually TCP or UDP to use The IAD displays the menu with the new status message Press Escape to continue The IAD prompts for the translated port number Enter NAT Local Server Translated Port Number 1 465535 2 0 Type the translated port number range 1
286. rence to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Verilink could void the user s authority to operate this equipment The NetEngine models below comply with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the bottom of the base of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence Number REN for the equipment You must upon request provide this information to your telephone company NOTE REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface xvii Before connecting your IAD you must inform the telephone company of the following information IAD SOC REN USOC FIC NE6200 8 NE7216 SOC 6 0N RJ48C 04DU9 BN NE7224 NE6200 8C 04DU9 DN NE7216C ND7224C 04DU9 1KN 04DU9 1SN NE6100 4 NE6108 REN 0 0B RJ11C An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telep
287. rent configuration page 273 NetEngine IAD User Guide Verification Power up Test Operational Test 272 The NetEngine IAD displays an indication of normal operation when you first power it up When you power it up verify that the POWER indicator on the front panel lights green Use the following procedure to verify that the IAD is operating properly after installation The following procedure assumes that You have configured Directory numbers DNs in the Class 5 switch for the associated Voice Ports The IAD has been connected to a terminal emulator via the console port displays the normal boot sequence and you can log in You have configured PVCs at the DSLAM default data 0 38 default voice is 0 39 when using ATM You have provisioned a data network You connected and configured a WAN link at the associated DSLAM or voice gateway For more information see Chapter 6 WAN Configuration page 51 You have a PC with Telnet and an Ethernet adapter running TCP IP For more information see Connecting via Telnet on page 16 For testing you and a counterpart stationed logged on to the upstream voice gateway can communicate via telephone or cell phone oe o Testing the IAD 1 Verify the WAN link status SDSL Interface the LINK indicator blinks while the IAD synchronizes with the DSLAM and lights continuously when the link is established T1 E1 Interface the LINK indicator
288. reset statistics for a specific protocol type the option The IAD immediately resets all statistics for the specified protocol and displays the menu Continue resetting network statistics or press Escape to return to the Network Statistics menu NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Interface Statistics Reports T T 215 Type I on the Reports menu to display interface statistics reports The Interface Statistics menu contains commands to display information about the packets handled between layer 2 and layer 3 on a per port basis and to clear statistics for specific protocols To display specific interface statistics first select an interface and optionally a port The IAD then displays the report as shown in these steps 1 The IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 TIZEI 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the interface 2 Ifthere is more than one port the IAD displays the port list and prompt Port DLC Encapsulation 1 18 Proprietary Voice DLCI Select Port 1 8 Type the port number and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the Interface Statistics menu NOTE The commands that display on the Network Statistics menu vary based on the WAN module and configuration of the IAD Figure 12 4 Interface Statistics Menu all options shown A Display ARP Statistics Ethernet only I Display Interface Statistics
289. rface Stats L M Configure Port Max Xmt Unit A Configure Bridge Aging Timer t M Display Media Stats L S Add Remove a Static Route T Enable Disable Spanning Tree Globally FR Display Route Table LR Enable Disable RIP O Enable Disable Spanning Tree by Port tA Display ARP Table LV Configure RIP Version by Port R Configure Spanning Tree Bridge Priority B Display Bridge Forwarding LP Configure RIP Poisoned Q Configure Spanning Tree Port Priority Database Reverse by Port H Configure Spanning Tree Hello Time S Display Bridge Status N Configure DNS Client S Configure Spanning Tree Max Age P epay PPP Authorization ki eee DHCP Client F Configure Spanning Tree Forward Delay tU Display System Uptime Ee Gonfigure GHCP Pelay C Configure Spanning Tree Path Cost O Display Memory Statistics Configure Telnet Server Port D Delete Bridge Database Entry LA Zero All Statistics F Configure IP Fiktering Q Configure IP Header Comp B Configure LAN IP Bdcst Dest D Display Route Table 7 Configure 5 Configure 6 Configure 8 Configure 9 System WAN LAN Login Utilities SNMP 1 Configure 1 10 Mbps ME Enable Disable 1 Change User ID Contact i Full D i i Datalink Protocol ull Duplex SNMP via IP 2 Change User ably 2 Configure 2 7 Hie LF Enable Disable Password before using Physical Interface alt Duplex SNMP via EOC 3 Change NetMan this menu 3 Configure 3 1 Ay Mapa A B Enable Disable Pas
290. rmation about the test progress Press a key to end ring test Ringing onhook lines Line 123 45 6 7 8 top ringing all lines Line 123 45 67 8 Ring test complete 4 Press any key to terminate the test The IAD displays the POTS Diagnostics menu 5 Continue with other tests or press Escape twice to return to the Main menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 264 Performing an On Off Hook Test The On Off Hook test reports the hook state of each voice port line To perform an On Off Hook test 1 Type o on the POTS Diagnostics menu to select On Off Hook Test The IAD displays the status of the test as it runs in real time Display hook state Legend onhook offhook ring ground amp no ring ground flash hook Press a key to exit D2 Bcd Or 67 8 Oye SH EG 2 Press Enter to terminate the test The IAD displays the POTS Diagnostics menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 265 SDSL To perform SDSL diagnostics type S on the Diagnostics menu Diagnostics A 6300 The SDSL diagnostics menu is only available on the 6300 The IAD displays the SDSL Diagnostics menu Figure 14 3 SDSL Diagnostics Menu kkxkxkxx xkxk xkxkx x xkxkxkxk xk x xkxk xkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxx kxx SDSL Diagnostics KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KK KK KKKKKKKKK KKK KK Select Diagnostic Transmit Isolated Pulses Continu
291. rmation you ve entered and updates the configuration Updating NAT Alias entry 2 Local IP address 91 1 1 223 Internet IP address 168 192 32 244 6 When the operation is complete press any key to display the NAT Configuration menu 7 Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 8 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuring NAT NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration NAT Statistics 196 When NAT is enabled you can review statistics gathered as NAT operates To display NAT statistics type s on the NAT Configuration menu The IAD displays the following information sample timeouts TCP 300 UDP 120 local to inet pkts 0 bytes 0 inet to local pkts 0 bytes 0 Connections TCP 0 UDP 0 ICMP 0 created 0 deleted 0 Total Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 First Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 Queued Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 Deleted Fragments local to inet 0 inet to local 0 Fragment Entries created 0 deleted 0 Errors cksum 0 retries 0 bad packets 0 Total IP pkts 0 Reserved addresses 0 Discarded packets 0 Press any key to return to the NAT Configuration menu Table 11 2 NAT Statistics Report Entry Description Timeouts TCP and UDP Timeout values Local to inet Number of packets and bytes transferring to the Internet inet to Local
292. roadcast destination address Type the new IP address 3 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuration Displaying To display the Route table and view information about statically configured the Route routes and dynamically learned ones type D on the Router Configuration menu Table The IAD displays each network address and related information Network AddressNetmask Gateway Address Interface Metric Type 9811 5 255 255 2550 Sr See rel 98 leleb 255 4295 255 0 Sie teal 99 9 9 1 255 255 255 0 100 9 9 9 91 ld tg 2955 255 2953295 O11 tet 91 31d TB 1 local 127 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 127 40 0 21 1 local Route Table parameters are described in the following table Table 5 3 Route Table Parameters Parameter Description Network Address destination address Netmask IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for the host ID Gateway Address IP address of packets sent to destination Interface IP address of outgoing interface Metric number of hops routers required to reach the specified gateway Type static dynamic RIP local NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 128 NetEngine IAD User Guide T T 6 Bridge Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the IAD as a bridge A bridge is a device that connects and pass
293. rovides WAN access over T1 E1 and telephone support for 16 voice ports via RJ21X connector NetEngine 7216c IAD provides WAN access over channelized T1 and telephone support for 16 voice ports via RJ21X connector NetEngine 7316 IAD provides WAN access over SDSL and telephone support for 16 voice ports via RJ21X connector Physical and electrical specifications for each IAD are listed in Appendix C NetEngine IAD Specifications on page 279 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators The front panel of the IAD contains several LEDs These LEDs provide general information about the operational status of the IAD NetEngine IAD User Guide Introduction Figure 1 4 7000 Family IAD Front Panel Front Panel NetEngine 7200 OO O 0 OO POWER LAN LAN WAN VOICE DCE DCE LINK ACT LINK LINK ACT Status Indicators Table 1 2 Front Panel LEDs LED Description POWER Iluminates when the IAD is powered on LAN LINK IIluminates when there is an operational LAN connection on the Ethernet port LAN ACT Flashes when there is activity on the Ethernet port WAN LINK Flashes as the IAD is establishing a link and illuminates solid when there is a proper connection on the DSL WAN port and synchronization has been achieved VOICE IIluminates when there is activity on the voice ports When connected to a Jetstream Voice Gateway it remains lit and blinks when there is activity DCE LINK IIluminates when there is a link between th
294. rrors Count of Far End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Far End of LOS Loss of Signal Frames No of Seconds of CRC Errors counts No of Minutes of CRC Errors counts Total Overall Failure Frames Count of Local Near End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Local Near End LOS Loss of Signal Frames Count of Remote Far End SEF Severely Errored Frames Count of Remote Far End LOS Loss of Signal Frames Current status of the ADSL standard in use NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 236 POTS Statistics Report Table 12 24 POTS Statistics Report Parameter Line X Active Inactive Buffers Revd Buffers Sent Discarded Underrun Description Current status of line X Active Phone line connection is up Inactive Phone line connection is down No of packets received from this POTS line No of packets sent to this POTS line Discarded packets due to Jitter Buffer Overrun The internal Jitter Buffer is full and could not allocate a new free packet buffer Discarded packets due to there are no packets waiting in the Jitter buffer NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports BRI Statistics Report 237 Table 12 25 BRI Statistics Report Parameter D Channel Active Inactive Frames Revd Frames Sent Rx Overflow RFO Rx Invalid Frames Rx Overflow RDO Rx CRC Errors Rx Aborted Tx Underrun Tx Collision B Channel Buffers Revd Buffers Sent Discarded U
295. rved for factory maintenance and development Before running any System Utilities call the Verilink Technical Support Center at 800 285 2755 toll free To display the current configuration and data transmission status 1 On the Main menu type 1 to display the Reports menu Figure 15 1 Reports Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKKK KKK Reports Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KKK C Display Current Configuration N Display Network Statistics I Display Interface Statistics M Display Media Statistics R Display Route Table A Display ARP Table B Display Bridge Forwarding Database S Display Bridge Status P U O 5 Display PPP Authorization Entries Display System Uptime Display Memory Statistic elect Display Current Configuration 2 Type c to display the current configuration For more information see Current Configuration Report on page 203 NetEngine IAD User Guide Verification 274 NetEngine IAD User Guide A Menu Map Menu Map This appendix provide a map of the menu interface for the NetEngine family of IADs ad User ID Password e off Eaa Requires a Supervisor password 2 Configure 3 Configure Menu IP Router Bridge MC Display Current Config t C Configure Port IP Address G Enable Bridging Globally TN Display Network Stats U Unconfigure Port IP Address P Enable Bridging by Port tl Display Inte
296. ry or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitted packets due to internal errors Replies Received No of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received No of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received No of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received No No No No No of ICMP Timestamp Requests messages received of ICMP Source Quench message received of ICMP Redirect message received of ICMP Echo Request message received of Echo Reply messages received No of ICMP Timestamp Replies messages received No of ICMP Information Requests messages received No of ICMP Information Replies messages received No of other ICMP types messages received Replies Sent No of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent No No No No No of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent of ICMP Source Quench message sent of ICMP Redirect message sent of ICMP Echo Request message sent NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 208 Table 12 2 ICMP Statistics Report Parameter Echo Replies sent Time stamp Requests sent Time stamp Replies sent Information Requests sent Information Replies sent Other types sent Description No No No No No No of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent of ICMP Timestamp Requests messages sent of ICMP Timestamp Replies messages sent of ICMP Information Request
297. s Feature LAN Interface Bridging Routing DHCP PPP HDLC Support Management Configuration Description 10 100 BaseT Ethernet RJ45 IEEE 802 1d including spanning tree Default Static RIP1 RFC 1058 RIP2 RFC 2453 IPCP for IP Packet Processing Server Client RFC 2131 Relay Agent PPPoA PAP CHAP IPCP RFC 1332 SNMP RFC 1157 MIB1 MIB2 RFC 1213 AAL2 LES MIB Enterprise MIB Console Telnet local remote NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 282 Table C 5 6000 Family WAN Interface Features Feature Description ADSL Glite Gdmt 6100 4 WAN Port Standards Transport DSLAMs Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols RJ45 ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 ITU T G 992 2 G 992 1 ATM Alcatel Cisco Lucent Nortel CopperCom JetStream TdSoft Tollbridge BLES General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 MGCP 1 0 support Point to Point PPP ADSL Annex A B 6104i WAN Port Standards Transport DSLAMs Voice Gateways Softswitches Protocols RJ45 ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 ITU T G 992 2 G 992 1 ATM Cisco Coppermountain Novae Lucent Nokia CopperCom JetStream AAL2 LES PSAX TdSoft Zhone Tollbridge General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel and any af vmoa 0145 compliant gateway MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 MGCP 1 0 support Point to Point PPP G SHDSL TCPAM SDSL 6504i 6504 6508 WAN Port Standards Transport DSLAMs Voice Gateway
298. s Softswitches Protocols SDSL 6300 WAN Port Line Rate Standards Transport RJ11 ITU T G 991 2 ATM Cisco Coppermountain Innovia Lucent Nokia CopperCom JetStream AAL2 LES PSAX TdSoft Zhone Tollbridge General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel and any af vmoa 0145 compliant gateway MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 MGCP 1 0 support Point to Point PPP RJ11 144 kbps to 2 3 mbps to 25 000 ft ITU T G991 2 ATM Frame Relay NetEngine IAD User Guide NetEngine IAD Specifications 283 Table C 5 6000 Family WAN Interface Features Feature Description DSLAMs Cisco Coppermountain Innovia Lucent Nokia Voice Gateways CopperCom JetStream AAL2 LES PSAX TdSoft Zhone Tollbridge General Bandwidth Accelerated Alcatel and any af vmoa 0145 compliant gateway Softswitches MCCP V0 1 NCS 1 0 support Protocols Point to Point PPP T1 Interface 6200c Network Interface Channelized T1 NX6 N 1 24 RJ48 Line Interface Balanced 100 Ohm Line Rate 1 544 mbps Clock Source Line local software selectable Diagnostic Built in CSU loopback FDL BOC per T1 403 1999 Line Coding B8ZS or AMI per T1 401 Framing D4 SF ESF per T1 403 or TRO8 Line Build out 0 7 5 15 or 22 5dB Receive Sensitivity Automatic Input Jitter Per ATT TR62411 Tolerance Protection Over voltage over current T1 Provisioning 6200c Provisioning Fractionally multiplexed voice and data Programming On a DSO basis NetEng
299. s effect Setting the Audio Bit Rate Margin 1 Type A to set the audio bit rate margin 2 The IAD displays Audio bit rate margin 0 3 Enter the new bit rate margin 0 to 50 and press Enter 4 You must reset the IAD page 15 before this change takes effect Setting the Minimum Signaling Bit Rate 1 Type to set the audio bit rate margin 2 The IAD displays Minimum signaling bit rate 0 3 Enter the new bit rate margin and press Enter 4 You must reset the IAD page 15 before this change takes effect Debugging AAL2 LES Gateways NOTE The commands in option D Debug Control are reserved for use by Verilink network engineers only Displaying AAL2 LES Statistics Type s to display the AAL2 LES Statistics menu Figure 7 25 AAL2 LES Statistics Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK AAL2 LES Statistics KAKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK D Display Audio CAS Alarm Statistics C Clear Statistics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying Audio CAS Alarm Statistics Type D to display transmitted and received audio CAS dropped and alarm statistics by line Press Escape to return to the menu or any other key to refresh the statistics and display the table Clearing Statistics Type Cc to clear all statistics The IAD resets the values to zero and displays the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 165 Con
300. s menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK For each option proceed to the corresponding section Enabling or Disabling All Channels 1 Type 1 to enable all channels Type 2 to disable all channels 2 The IAD makes the change and resets the interface The menu and reset messages may conflict press any key to refresh the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 79 Enabling or Disabling Specific Channels 1 Type 3 to enable or disable specific channels If all channels are disabled this option enables specific channels Conversely if all channels are enabled this option disables specific channels 2 The IAD displays this prompt Select Channel to Enable Disable then press Enter 3 For each channel type the number and press Enter When you have entered all channels to enable or disable press Enter 4 The IAD makes the change and saves the configuration and displays the E1 Configuration menu 5 Continue with other configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish E1 configuration Selecting a Channel Range 1 Type 4 to enable a range of channels 2 The IAD displays the channel status and a prompt Tx Channels Enabled No Channels Enabled Select a Channel Range to Enable Available Range 1 to 24 First Channel of Range gt Type the beginning channel and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the second prompt Last Channel of Range gt Type the
301. s messages sent of ICMP Information Replies messages sent of other ICMP types messages sent IGMP Statistics Report To display the IGMP Statistics report type G on the Network Statistics menu The IGMP Statistics report displays details about IGMP Internet Group Message Protocol received packets sent packets and queries reports and messages sent and received Table 12 3 IGMP Statistics Report Parameter Received Packet Informat packets received discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors discarded for other reasons unrecognized codes bad checksums packets smaller than header Sent Packet Information packets sent discarded for lack of resources discarded due to internal errors with illegal type or code Queries Reports and Mes Membership Query received Ver 1 Membership Report received Description ion Total IGMP packets received Discarded received packets due to lack of resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded packets due to other reasons Not used Value of the Checksums field in header is incorrect Size of IGMP header is larger than packet size Total IGMP packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources such as kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded transmitted packets due to internal software errors Discarded transmitt
302. s use an RJ48 connector on the IAD rear panel for WAN connection To make the connection plug the cable from the ATM network into the RJ48 WAN connector Table D 8 on page 291 lists the pinouts for the T1 E1 connector USI Connection 7200 7300 7200 7000 family IADs have a Universal Serial Interface USI port 7300 configurable for V 35 or EIA 530 page 37 If your IAD is equipped with a USI port you may connect it now Located on the rear panel the port uses a shielded DB25 connector The connector is DCE data is transmitted on the receive pin and received on the transmit pin The V 35 or EIA 530 interfaces use different voltage levels You must supply the appropriate cable for each interface Table D 9 on page 291 lists the USI port pinouts and signal specifications Telephone Connections 6000 family IADs provide 4 or 8 RJ11 ports for POTS devices or ISDN connectors for telephone service 7000 family IADs provide an RJ21X Amphenol style connector for connecting up to 16 telephone devices These devices may be POTS telephones modems FAX machines or other POTS compatible devices Making RJ11 Connections 6000 family The RJ11 POTS port pinouts are telco standard RJ11 POTS Port Pin Assignments on page 289 Connect each telephone device to the RJ11 jacks using 26AWG telephone cord or better user provided Making ISDN Connections 6104i 65041 The RJ45 BRI IDSN SO ports are telco standard RJ45 BRI ISDN SO Port
303. scape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish IP filter configuration Deleting a Filter from the Buffer To delete a filter currently stored in the buffer type x The IAD deletes the filter from the buffer and displays the IP Filter Configuration menu Deleting an IP Filter To delete a filter from the IP Filter table toggle input or output filters Option T on the IP Filtering Configuration menu and follow these steps 1 On the IP Filtering Configuration menu type x to select Delete one filter of the chosen type 2 The IAD displays the filter table for this interface and prompts for a filter number to delete T1 E1 Output Filters Enabled num state action srcLwP srcHiP src ip add low src ip add hi QoS proto mask dstLwP dstHiP dst ip add low dst ip add hi Level 0 Idle Pass 0 65535 166 192 1210 255 255 255 25 5 TCP 0H 0 65535 92 100 1 1 255 255 255 255 0 Type the filter number to delete and press Enter 3 The IAD permanently removes the filter from the table and displays the IP Filtering Configuration menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Configuration menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish IP filter configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 125 Deleting All Filters of the Chosen Type To delete all filters from the IP Filter table toggle input or output filters Option T on the IP Fi
304. splays the port prompt Select Compression 1 PCM64K 2 ADPCM32K Compression Type the option for the selected compression 4 The IAD saves the changes and displays the menu 5 Press Escape to return to the CopperCom Configuration menu and continue configuration 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Setting Framing Format 1 Type F to display the CopperCom Configuration menu with Frame Relay mode options Figure 7 17 CopperCom Statistics Menu KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK CopperCom Configuration KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK Current Frame Relay Mode 44 octets amp Multiple packets 1 36 octet packet Single packet per fram 2 44 octet packet Multiple packets per frame NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 157 Type 1 to select a 36 octet packet using a single packet per frame or type 2 to select a 44 octet packet with multiple packets per frame 2 The IAD saves the changes and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the CopperCom Configuration menu and continue configuration 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration CopperCom Debug Control The commands in the CopperCom Debug Control menu are reserved for use by Verilink or CopperCom network engineers NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 158 JetStream When you have specified the JetStr
305. ss and a prompt Current DHCP Server address 94 1 1 1 Enter new DHCP Server IP address 94 1 1 1 gt Type the new DHCP Server IP address 3 The IAD saves the changes and displays the Router Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 118 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration Displaying DHCP Relay Statistics To display information about DHCP Relay type s on the DHCP Relay menu When DHCP Relay is enabled the IAD displays this report 215 Client requests forwarded to DHCP server 1 Client requests dropped 190 Server responses forwarded to DHCP clients 0 Server responses dropped 2 Unknown server responses 7 Server requests timed out Press any key to return to the DNS Client menu when you re done reviewing the information NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Configur ing the Telnet Server Port Configur ing IP Filtering T 119 When using NAT on the IAD it is often desired to configure a host behind NAT as a Telnet Server In this case Telnet requests are passed to the host and not handled by the IAD By changing the Telnet port both the host and IAD may be accessed via Telnet To set the port for the Telnet Server follow these steps 1 On the Router Configuration menu type T to select Configure Teln
306. stem has been running for 11 hours 45 minutes 26 seconds Press any key to return to the Reports menu Type O on the Reports menu to display the Memory Statistics menu The Memory Statistics menu 1 0 contains two memory display commands Figure 12 8 Memory Statistics Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKKKKKKKKKK Memory Statistic Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKK M Display System Memory Statistic T Display Kernel Tasks Memory Statistic To display a specific memory statistic report type the option For details see the corresponding section following System Memory Statistics Report Type M on the Memory Statistics menu to display the System Memory Statistics report The System Memory Statistics report displays the following details about system memory Total Memory Size 8192KB 8388608 Bytes Total Allocated Memory T454KB 7633688 Bytes Total Free Memory 737KB 754920 Bytes Kernel Memory Size 1152KB 1179648 Bytes Kernel Memory Allocated 901KB 922848 Bytes Allocated Blocks 1143 Blocks Largest Alloc Block Size 159KB 163248 Bytes NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Zero All Statistics 241 Highest Memory Used 901KB 922959 Bytes Kernel Fr Memory 241KB 247016 Bytes Free Blocks 1 Blocks Largest Free Block Size 241KB 247016 Bytes Reserved Area Siz 1024KB 1048576 Bytes When you
307. stics Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying CopperCom Statistics Type D to display CopperCom statistics The IAD displays the following error statistics report HEC Errors 0 CID Errors 0 Timer Errors 0 Clearing CopperCom Statistics Type Cc to reset CopperCom statistics The IAD sets the statistics to zero and displays the menu Press Escape to return to the CopperCom Call Control menu CopperCom Configuration Type C to display the CopperCom Configuration menu NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 156 Figure 7 16 CopperCom Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK CopperCom Configuration KEKE KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKEK D Display Configuration C Compression Format F Framing Format Type the option for the command to execute and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying CopperCom Configuration Type D to display the current configuration settings The IAD displays the following information Configuration Current Frame Relay Mode 44 octets amp Multiple packets Setting Compression Format You can set compression globally or by port 1 Type C to set the compression format 2 The IAD displays the port prompt Configure Compression Format for Port 0 for ALL Type the port number or type 0 to set the compression for all ports 3 The IAD di
308. sword ull Duplex i PVCs DLCls p SNMP via IP amp EOC 4 Change Supervisor Password 4 Configure 4 100 Mbps P Configure System A ATM FR Options Half Duplex Contact 5 Change Primary RADIUS Server Address 5 Auto negotiate LN Configure System 6 Change Primary RADIUS Encrypt Secret Full Duplex Name 7 Change Secondary RADIUS Server Address 6 Auto negotiate L Configure System 8 Change Secondary RADIUS Encrypt Secret Half Duplex Location a aa 9 Display RADIUS Configuration L7 Auto negotiate C Configure SNMP Speed amp Read Write Comm Duplex Mode T Configure SNMP Trap Host IP Address U Enable Disable SNMP Traps via EOC D Configure Restart Trap Max Delay NetEngine IAD User Guide Menu Map D Configure DHCP E Enable Disable DHCP H Enable Disable Checking for Add l DHCP Servers Enable Disable DHCP Debug Messages Configure DHCP Server Parameters M Configure Multicast E Enable Disable Global IP Multicasting P Config PIM Dense Mode by Port S Add Change Multicast Route Source G Show IGMP Group P Configure DHCP IGMP Querier Address Range Pool Show Multicast C Configure DHCP Routing Table Client Entry N Show PIM Neighbor F Display DHCP Configuration S Display DHCP Server Statistics Display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses U Display DHCP Server Unassigned Addresses D Display DHCP Entry Details X
309. t spanning tree topology change packets sent Total of bridge packet received from interface Total bridge octets bytes received from interface Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory or packet buffers Discarded received packets due to lack of packet buffers or Spanning Tree packets arrived on an interface when Spanning Tree is not enabled No of bridge packets sent to a proper low level output port No of bridge packets sent to all other bridge ports Total bridge packets sent Total octets bytes of bridge packets sent Discarded transmitted packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc No of Spanning Tree Configuration packets received No of Spanning Tree Topology Change packets received No of invalid Spanning Tree packets such as Wrong LSAP Control Protocol ID Version Length and Message Type value No of Spanning Tree Configuration packets sent No of Spanning Tree Topology Change packets sent DLCI Statistics Report To display the DLCI Statistics Data Link Connection Identifier report Type D on the Interface Statistics menu This option is only displayed when Frame Relay is selected as the data link protocol NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports Table 12 11 DLCI Statist Parameter Committed Burst Excess Burst Throughput Rx Frames 219 ics Description No of committed info rate bytes per measurement
310. t below the banner Figure 4 7 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKK KKK WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKK KKK Current DataLink Protocol Frame Relay 6 ATM 7 Frame Relay This option applies only to IADs E TDM Voice lt WW with channelized T1 WAN ports 3 Type E to select TDM Voice 4 The IAD displays the current channel configuration and prompts you for the number of voice channels to allocate Current configuration table is Ch Configuration 1 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 1 2 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 3 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 3 N 24 VOICE Undefined Mode Linked to POTS port 24 Enter number of voice channels desired for this chunk Type the number of voice channels 5 The IAD asks you for the starting channel Enter the starting channel of this voice channel chunk Type the starting channel number for this chunk of circuits 6 The IAD asks if you want to allocate more circuits Do you want to continue allocating new chunks y n 7 Type Y to repeat these steps or N to continue 8 The IAD asks you for the number of data channels to allocate Enter the number of data channels desired Type the number of voice channels NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 10 11 12 13 14
311. t priority on the network as the Root Bridge To set the Spanning Tree bridge priority a value between 1 and 65 565 default 32 768 follow these steps 1 E ee Type R on the Bridge Configuration menu to select Configure Spanning Tree Bridge Priority The IAD displays the following instructions Enter Bridge Priority 1 65535 32768 Type the priority and press Enter The IAD updates the configuration Press any key to display the Bridge Configuration menu Continue with other configuration tasks Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish bridge configuration The spanning tree algorithm uses the spanning tree bridge priority to determine which bridge to use as the Ethernet LAN destination when two or more bridges are bridging between the same LAN To set the Spanning Tree priority by port range 0 255 default 128 follow these steps the lower the value the higher the priority 1 2 On the Bridge Configuration menu type Q to select Configure Spanning Tree Port Priority The IAD displays the interfaces available on this IAD and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port for which you want to set the priority NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Config uring Spanning Tree Hello Time Config uring Spanning Tree Maximum Age 136 If more than one interface is configured on the selected port the IAD d
312. t the confirmation step or reset the IAD T NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 26 Changing the User Level User ID To change the user ID for the User security level the only security level that allows the user ID to be changed follow these steps 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu Type 1 to change the user ID for the User security level Enter new User ID 2 up to 17 characters gt Type the new User ID and press Enter The IAD informs you that the user ID has been updated 4 Reset the IAD page 15 3 Including User ID and Passwords in Config Files If you create master configuration files for distribution to multiple IADs you may include the userid and passwords directly in the configuration file to reduce configuration tasks NOTE When the user ID and passwords are stored ina configuration file the IAD saves the configuration file immediately upon rebooting without requiring the log on process The userid and passwords are stripped from the configuration file before saving to prevent a security risk Using a text editor update the config file by adding the following attributes in the user category T userid string password string netman password string support password string The password parameter is for user level access netman password is for network administrator level access and support password is for supervisor
313. t version 1 2Bcst 2Ml1ti gt slot interface port on off Keyword to enable on or disable off RIP on the specified port version 1 2Bcst 2Mlti Keyword identifying version to implement Must be preceded by keyword version slot Slot number 1 to 7 interface Keyword identifying the interface ethernet adsl xdsl sdsl port Port number 1 to 8 Description Displays the current configuration show configuration Description Displays the DHCP server configuration show dhcp server configuration Description Displays the IP route table show ip routes Description Receives a file from the TFTP server identified by the IP address The file must exist in the default directory of the TFTP server tftp receive lt IP address gt lt file name gt IP address IP address of TFTP server file name name of file to receive NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 258 NetEngine IAD User Guide 14 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics This chapter describes procedures for troubleshooting and diagnosing problems that may be associated with the IAD Diagnostics are destructive and may result in loss of connection to network or voice gateway After running diagnostics reset the IAD to return to normal working order This chapter contains the following topics Using the Diagnostics menu page 260 Performing POTS diagnostics page 260 Performing SDSL diagnostics page 2
314. tabase Entry 138 Chapter 7 Voice Path Configuration Basic Voice Path Setup Tasks cccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 140 Voice Path Configuration M Nnu ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 140 Setting the Voice Gateway 0 0 0 0 eeesccceeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 vi NetEngine IAD User Guide Setting Jitter Delay pcutna dy entre ceria dausr eee vereverees iuidavecttebdutebavs 142 Displaying Jitter Delay igiseciccsicss eeettcacsediveyivebexioiy bind lecdieebiadde 143 Setting Start Mode aeiiccaieaccsetpe tev atadlatiinadeladnatnndebceduaMetauucgate 143 Setting SLIC Control Mode eeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 Setting Compander MOde cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeees 145 Set On Hook Transmission MOdGC cccecceeeeeeeeeseeteeees 145 Setting Idle Voltage MOUS sa pscscccicetssiscdbeenieebienthintneenaseeebiesade 146 Setting Debug IOS sisi det nite nesraeretecedeneddisddeleaneeectduamenieiticeie 147 Configuring Echo Cancellation 0 cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Setting Loop GAIN gcoctecevantosudnnndiasixnnsencesuencoenenduteuneusemataotenneds 148 Setting Country MOde ccccccsccceeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeteeeeeeneeeeees 150 Managing MGCP Embedded Client cceeeeeeeeeeeees 151 Managing CopperCom Call Conttrol 0 ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 155 JetStream Call Control SettingS cceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeee
315. tails cccceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 197 NAT Local Server Table ies occa ieeero vise eermetiee 199 NAT Alias Table ccecceceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeed 199 Deleting IP Addresses from NAT Tables eee 199 viii NetEngine IAD User Guide Deleting a NAT Local Server Enttry ccceeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 200 Deleting a NAT Alias Entry ceeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 200 Chapter 12 IAD Reports The Report M nu cecccseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeseeaees 202 Current Configuration Report ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeees 203 Network Statistics Reports ccccsessssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 206 Interface Statistics Reports sissdeeecceebcbedend eau teepeverevevierieaduceeedae 215 Media Statistics Reports siccisccccsssnannedctsnsatonsreeiiasgadeutiendecaiecs 226 Route Table Report ssssessnsesseererneeernnrnnseerrrrrnnsserrnnnnseet 238 ARP Table Report ceceeeecccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 238 Bridge Forwarding Database Report cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 Bridge Status Report scticcried sets scesesensesysyecsvarbveazerSeasbatelueveeeeniar 239 PPP Authorization Entries Report ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeees 239 System Uptime Report cecccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 240 Memory Statistics Reports ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee
316. tain CMCP NOTE When using a CopperMountain DSLAM CMCP allows the DSLAM to configure many IAD parameters automatically IAD parameters controlled by CMCP include fragmentation and voice gateway support For more information refer the CopperMountain DSLAM guide To enable or disable Coppermountain CMCP 1 On the Main menu select Configure WAN to display the WAN Configuration menu 2 Select Configure FR Options to display the Frame Relay Options menu page 97 3 Select Enable Disable CopperMountain CMCP The IAD displays the following instructions CMCP is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable 4 Do one of the following To enable CopperMountain CMCP type E or To disable CopperMountain CMCP type D 5 Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Toggling CMCP Debugging Option E Toggle CMCP Debugging displays when Coppermountain is selected as a Gateway and is reserved for use by Verilink and Coppermountain network engineers This command enables and disables CopperMountain Control Protocol CMCP debugging You select it once to display the number of transmitted and received CMCP packets in bytes Select it a second time to disable the display NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration Quick Con figuration 102 The 6300 contains a number of predefined configurations for physical connections and PVCs 6300 The Quick Configuration option only displays on the NetEn
317. tgoing cell Out of cells for transmit Internal cell buffer could not be allocated for transmitting cells Discarded Transmitted Cells because the connection is not established disconnected closed Discarded Received Cells because connection not established disconnected closed AAL5 only CRC 32 header checksum in is wrong No of SAR reassembly timeouts Frames could not be reassembling and discarded Frame size is larger than the max size of PDU NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports 224 IP Header Compression Statistics Report This report is available when ATM PVC Encapsulation Type RFC 1483 is selected an IP address is assigned and IP Header Compression is enabled on the ATM Interface Table 12 16 IP Header Compression Statistics Report Parameter Description Missed TCP contexts No of times search didn t find a TCP stream Missed RTP context No of times search didn t find an RTP stream Sent Packet Information Compressed TCP packets No of compressed TCP packets sent sent Compressed UDP packets No of compressed UDP packets sent Sent Compressed RTP packets No of compressed RTP packets sent Sent FULL_HEADER packets No of FULL_HEADER packets sent Sent CONTEXT_STATE No of CONTEXT TATE packets sent packets sent Received Packet Information Compressed TCP packets No of compressed TCP packets received received Compressed UDP packets No of compressed UDP packets r
318. tifies a call as up and the other side thinks the call as down To reset the connection type the number of the port and press Enter Configuring Default Packet Size 1 Type P to configure the packet size default 5 5 ms 2 The IAD displays the following prompt Enter packet size in ms 5 5 gt Type the packet size value and press Enter The IAD saves the new packet size and displays the menu 4 Press Escape to return to the MGCP menu and continue with other voice path configuration 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration w NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 155 Managing Copper Com Call Control When your IAD is configured for connection to a Coppercom Voice Gateway option V on the VoicePath Configuration menu P V type E on the Main menu to display the CopperCom Call Control menu Figure 7 14 CopperCom Call Control Menu KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK CopperCom Call Control KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKKKKKK KKK S Statistics C Configure D Debug Type the option for the task to perform and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying CopperCom Statistics Type s to display the CopperCom Statistics menu Figure 7 15 CopperCom Statistics Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKK KKK CopperCom Statistics KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK D Display Statistics Cs Clear Stati
319. ting table Type s to add or change the Multicast Route Source The IAD displays the Multicast Routing Source menu Figure 10 2 Multicast Routing Source Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Multicast Routing Source Menu KEKE K KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK EKEKK A Add a Multicast Routing Source R Remove a Multicast Routing Source S Show Multicast Routing Source NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration Adding a Multicast Routing Source 184 Type A to add a Multicast Routing Source The IAD creates a multicast routing source and adds it to the Multicast Routing Source Table 1 The IAD displays the IP address prompt Enter IP address for the Source Type the source IP address and press Enter 2 The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompt Enter subnet mask for the source 255 255 255 0 gt Type the new subnet address and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the interface 4 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter 5 The IAD saves the new configuration a
320. tion tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration Setting the DNS Server Timeout To set the DNS Server Timeout 1 On the DNS Client menu type T to select Set DNS Server Timeout 2 The IAD displays the prompt and current value Enter DNS Server Timeout in seconds 5 20 5 Type the new timeout value default 5 and press Enter 3 The IAD updates the configuration and displays the DNS Client menu 4 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 5 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 115 Displaying the DNS Cache and Statistics To display information about the data in the DNS cache type s When DNS Client is enabled the IAD displays the following information IP Address Timer Host Name 392 Total Requests 117 Requests Serviced From Cache 295 Requests Sent to Server 2 Server Timeouts 293 Server Good Responses 3 Server Not Found Responses 19 Server Unexpected Responses 1 Errors Sending to Server Press any key to return to the DNS Client menu when you re done reviewing the information NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Config uring DHCP Client 116 To enable or disable DHCP Client on an interface follow these steps T 2 Type H on the Router Configur
321. tional section contains detailed descriptions examples if necessary and any limits exceptions or warnings you should be aware of when using this command NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface 245 Command Line Interface Reference exit ping quit rename file Each command in the command line interface is described below in alphabetic order Description Quits the command line interface and returns to the menu system exit Description Pings an IP address The IP address must be on the same subnet Press Escape to premature halt the test Upon termination displays a summary table ping lt IP address gt size tries IP address IP address of destination in octal format 999 999 999 999 size Packet size in number of bytes 0 1450 default 32 tries Number of attempts 0 1000 0 is continuous default 4 tries Description Quits the command line interface and returns to the menu interface Description Changes the name of a file rename file lt old name gt lt new name gt old name File name of existing file new name New name of file NetEngine IAD User Guide Command Line Interface reset system remove lan ip address set bridge global 246 Description Performs a soft system reset reset system Discussion Any time you use the menu or command line interface to make setting changes or change any of the physical characteristics of the IAD such as changing the MAC
322. to assign Low address minimum IP address to assign Client Number client entry number Host name name of the host IP address IP address of outgoing interface Subnet mask IP subnet mask number of bits reserved for host ID Lease time length of time to keep the Internet connection active Gateway IP address of packets sent to destination DNS Server IP address of the DNS server 177 When you re done viewing the information press any key to return to the menu NetEngine IAD User Guide DHCP Server Configuration 178 Displaying DHCP Server Statistics Displaying DHCP Server Assigned and Un assigned Addresses Type s to display DHCP Server statistics The IAD displays the following information about the DHCP Server Table 9 2 DHCP Server Statistics Statistics plain bootp requests received plain bootp replys sent discover packets sent offer packets sent dhcp request packets received declines received releases received acks sent nacks sent requests for other servers protocol errors For the IAD to display this information you must attach DHCP Client devices that use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the IAD Type A to display DHCP Server Assigned Addresses or type U to display DHCP Server Unassigned Addresses The IAD displays the following information about the DHCP Server assigned addresses Table 9 3 DHCP Server Assigned Addresses Field Description IP IP address of the device
323. to perform a task and proceed to the corresponding section Adding a Static Route To add a static route to the Route Table 1 On the Router Modification menu type A to select Add a Static Route 2 The IAD prompts for the destination address Enter destination address of route to add Type the destination address to add and press Enter 3 The IAD displays the current subnet mask and prompt Enter network mask of route 255 2552990 gt Type the network mask and press Enter 4 The IAD prompts for the gateway address Enter gateway of route Type the gateway address press Enter 5 The static route is added The IAD prompts for confirmation Route successfully added Save this route in the static configuration Y 6 Type Y to confirm or Escape to cancel If you confirm the Route Table is updated and the IAD prompts to add more routes Add another route Y 7 Type Y to confirm or Escape to cancel Repeat these steps for each route that you want to add 9 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Router Modification menu 10 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration o9 NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration Setting the Default Route 113 Removing a Static Route To delete a static route from the Route Table 1 2 On the Router Modification menu type R to select Remove a Route The IAD prompts for the address of the route to remove
324. to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect Configuring Restart Trap Maximum Delay Type D to configure the restart trap maximum delay time 1 The IAD displays the prompt Enter SNMP Restart Trap Maximum Delay Time in Seconds 0 600 0 Type the new value in seconds and press Enter The IAD saves the configuration Continue with other SNMP settings or press Escape to return to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 for changes to take effect NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Upgrading the System m 33 Periodically Verilink may provide new software that you will download to the IAD to upgrade the system You must use TFTP to perform the file transfer when upgrading the entire system NOTE Some gateways directly support file transfer as a means of upgrading IADs For information refer to the Voice Gateway manufacturer s operating manual To use TFTP you must configure both the IAD and the computer that contains the TFTP Server program a program that you license separately Using TFTP Servers via LAN or WAN Before the IAD can access a LAN or Intranet based TFTP server you must configure the IP address of the Ethernet port page 13 on the same subnet as your TFTP server and the IAD must be connected to the LAN To access a WAN based server you must configure the T1 E1 or xDSL Interface with a management DLCI or PVC and a WAN IP address For informat
325. ts and press Enter IP address Fully qualified host and domain names for example radius Verilink com maximum 42 bytes NOTE int If you enter host and domain names you must configure the IAD as a DNS client page 114 4 Reset the IAD page 15 Changing the RADIUS Encryption Secret To change the primary or secondary RADIUS encryption key 1 On the Main menu type 8 Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu page 25 2 Type 6 to select Change Primary RADIUS Encryption Secret or type 8 to change Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret The IAD displays the following message Primary Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret is currently Enter new Primary Secondary RADIUS Encryption Secret NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration 28 3 Type the new encryption key and press Enter 4 Reset the IAD page 15 Displaying the RADIUS Configuration To display the current RADIUS server configuration 1 On the Main menu select Configure Login to display the Password Configuration menu page 25 2 Type 9 to select Display RADIUS Configuration The IAD displays the following information Primary RADIUS Server Primary RADIUS Secret Secondary RADIUS Server Secondary RADIUS Secret NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration Setting Up SNMP T 29 You can enable SNMP over IP and or EOC when the voice gateway is AAL2 LES CAS or ELCP By default the IAD is configured w
326. ts menu 78 S Bits configuring for E1 77 SDSL connecting to IAD 21 diagnostics 265 SDSL auto cycle speed table 68 SDSL Configuration menu 65 SDSL Diagnostics menu 265 SDSL interface mode setting 67 SDSL interface configuring 6500 63 SDSL speed setting for IMAS DSLAM 67 SDSL speed setting manually 67 security level default passwords for 25 privileges 24 Select Tx Clock Source menu 75 Serial Statistics report 228 set bridge global CLI command 246 set bridge stp global CLI command 247 set dhcp server dns CLI command 247 set dhcp server domain CLI command 247 set dhcp server enable CLI command 247 set dhcp server gateway CLI command 247 set dhcp server netbios CLI command 247 set dhcp server range CLI command 248 set dhcp server subnet CLI command 247 set dns server address CLI command 248 set ip default route CLI command 248 set ip route CLI command 248 set lan bridge CLI command 249 set lan ip address CLI command 249 set lan rip CLI command 250 set lan stp bridge CLI command 250 set mgcp bracketing CLI command 250 set mgcp listening port CLI command 251 set mgcp signaling connection CLI Command 251 set mgcp signaling port CLI Command 251 set mgcp signaling tos CLI Command 251 set mgcp voice connection CLI Command 252 set mgcp voice tos CLI Command 252 set nat CLI Command 252 set sdsl speed CLI Command 253 set system defaults CLI Command 253 set wan atm ppp auth CLI Command 253 set wan atm vc CLI Command 254 set wan datalink CLI
327. ty Length of the cell is larger than the PDU size Transmitted cell overflow Cell Allocation Problem Length of transmitting cells is larger than PDU size Value of UUI User to User information in the header of the cells transmitted is incorrect Total AAL2 Cells received in bytes Total AAL2 Cells received No of receiving cells discarded because Invalid Microcell Channel The microcell is empty The cell length is larger than the PDU size Transmitted cell overflow Cell Allocation Problem The length of the cells received is larger than the PDU size Value of UUI User to User information in the header of the cells received is incorrect No of errors of reassembling AAL2 cells Could not allocate an internal Cell buffer Value of STF Start Field in the header is incorrect Value of the Sequence Number in the header is incorrect out of sequence Common AAL Statistics Report This report displays when ATM protocol is configured Table 12 15 Common AAL Statistics Report Parameter Vcc Status Description Number the VCC VPI VCI value Current status of this AAL connection The status is the addition of the values Connection Active 1 Connection Confirm 16 Connection Created 32 Connection Congestion 2 For example if status is 33 the connection is Active and Created NetEngine IAD User Guide 223 Table 12 15 Common AAL Statistics Report Parameter Max PDU
328. u for input the current value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter T NetEngine IAD User Guide Multicast Configuration 182 Configur Type M to display the Multicast Configuration menu mg Figure 10 1 Multicast Configuration Menu Multicast kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxxk kxx k Multicast Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK a a a a a a a a a a KKK Enable Disable Global IP Multicasting Config PIM Dense Mode by Port Add Change Multicast Route Source Show IGMP Group Show IGMP Querier Show Multicast Routing Table Show PIM Neighbor ZAsxOonnue The Multicast Configuration menu contains commands to configure IP Multicast Routing The IAD only displays the Multicast Configuration menu when DHCP Server is enabled and the IAD has been reset When you have completed multicast configuration reset the IAD for the changes to take effect Enabling To enable or disable global IP Multicasting follow these steps and 1 Type E to select Enable Disable Global IP Multicasting Disabling 2 The IAD displays the status and prompt Global IP ulticast Router is current y DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Multicast Type E to enable IP multicasting or type D to disable it 3 The IAD saves the new configuration and displays the Multicast Configuration menu
329. u to select Configure RIP Poisoned Reverse by Port 2 The IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the number of the port to enable or disable 3 The IAD displays the RIP status of this port and a prompt RIP Poisoned Reverse for Slot 1 Port 1 is currently DISABLED Enter E to Enable D to Disable Type E to enable RIP Poisoned Reverse or type D to disable it 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the Router Configuration menu 5 Repeat these steps for each port for which you want to enable RIP poisoned reverse 6 Continue with other configuration tasks or press Escape to return to the Main menu 7 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish router configuration NetEngine IAD User Guide Router Configuration 111 Setting the RIP Version To set the RIP version 1 2 Type v on the Router Configuration menu to select Configure RIP Version by Port If more than one WAN port is installed or more than one PVC DLCI exists the IAD displays the interfaces on this IAD sample shown Available Interfaces 1 SDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Type the interface number to set The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 0 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface ca
330. uction NetEngine 6500 ADs provides voice services and high speed Internet or corporate connectivity over GSHDSL and provides 4 or 8 voice ports 6504 and 6508 NetEngine 6104i 6504i ADs provides voice services and high speed Internet or corporate connectivity over ADSL 6104i or G SHDSL 6504i plus 4 ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI ports for up to 8 voice extensions Physical and electrical specifications for each IAD are listed in Appendix C NetEngine IAD Specifications on page 279 Front Panel Power and Status Indicators The front panel of the IAD contains several LEDs These LEDS provide general information about the operational status of the IAD P 1 2 6000 Family Front Panel Indicators Table 1 1 LED POWER LAN LINK LAN ACT WAN LINK VOICE E a t e o A R N VERILINK 6000 Family Front Panel Indicators Description llluminates when the IAD is powered on llluminates when there is an operational LAN connection on the Ethernet port Flashes when there is activity on the Ethernet port Flashes as the IAD is establishing a link and illuminates solid when there is a proper connection on the WAN port and synchronization has been achieved IIluminates when there is activity on the voice ports When connected to a Jetstream Voice Gateway it remains lit and blinks when there is activity NetEngine IAD User Guide Introduction Rear Panel Connectors On the rear panel
331. uide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Trouble shooting the IAD 267 This section provides information for troubleshooting symptoms associated with the operation of the IAD Table 14 1 describes symptoms probable causes and suggested corrective action to correct the problem Table 14 1 Troubleshooting Symptoms and Causes Symptom Power indicator is not lit LAN Link indicator is not lit No dial tone is present Probable Cause Power is not available to the IAD Incorrect Ethernet connection Incorrect PVC DLCI set for voice channel IAD is improperly provisioned at the voice gateway Incorrect network provisioning Incorrect directory number at the Class 5 switch Corrective Action Ensure that the power cord is securely connected Ensure that the power cord is plugged into a live outlet Ensure that the power switch is on If powered by an adapter ensure that the correct adapter is used Ensure that an Ethernet cable is properly connected to the IAD and its upstream connection Verify these settings VPI 0 to 255 VCI 0 to 65535 DLCI 16 to 1023 default PVC 0 39 DLCI 33 Verify and correct provisioning of IAD as required Table 9 2 Check and correct network provisioning at DSLAM network switches etc Check and correct as required NetEngine IAD User Guide Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 268 Table 14 1 Troubleshooting Symptoms an
332. ul 7 5 dB Long haul 15 dB Long haul 22 5 dB Long haul O oOo uuna b UNA Type the option to select the line build out that corresponds to the T1 span length in use 2 The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration Selecting B8ZS or AMI 1 To set zero suppression type 4 to select B8Zs or AMI The IAD displays the current setting and a prompt Zero suppression is currently B8ZS Would you like to set it to AMI Y Yes Type Y to change the setting 2 The IAD resets the interface and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the T1 Configuration menu and continue with other configuration tasks 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish T1 configuration Configuring Loopback 1 Type 5 to configure loopback 2 The IAD displays the current setting for each type of loopback and ESP loopback commands and the Loopback menu NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 74 Figure 4 27 Loopback Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KKK Select Loopback Configuration KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK Outward Payload Loopback DISABLED Outward Line Loopback DISABLED Inward Loopback Master Mode Only DISABLED Line amp Payload Loopback Command Receive ESF Only DISABLED 1 Enable D
333. ulator int T T 11 vertically ensure at least 3 inches of distance between other IADs or other equipment NOTE 6000 family IADs may be stacked on top of one another when mounted horizontally 7000 family ADs may be rack mounted Wiring Requirements Make sure that the telephone wiring LAN and WAN cables reach the IAD and can be dressed in a manner that is safe for the wiring does not pull or create lateral stress on the connectors or ports on the rear of the IAD and does not present a trip hazard to personnel working in the vicinity of the equipment Do not connect any cables or wiring at this time The IAD is configured and managed from either the console or Ethernet port Most network engineers use Telnet to access the IAD via Ethernet After you use a terminal emulator program via the console port to set the IP address you may continue to use a terminal emulator via the console port if you choose NOTE After a period of inactivity three minutes by default the IAD automatically terminates console based and Telnet sessions to maintain security To change this value see Configuring the Console Timeout Period on page 38 Before you can connect to the IAD via Telnet make sure the IP address is set correctly for this network To do so follow the steps each described in detail below 1 Connect the IAD to a PC 2 Log into the IAD 3 Setthe IP address NOTE Be sure that the IAD and PC are both powered OFF before
334. ure the timeout The local server protocol you select determines which timeout to configure TDP and UDP are similar except that TCP tracks TCP clients on a per connection basis and removes them from the table as soon as the connection closes To configure a NAT timeout On the NAT Configuration menu page 190 type T to select TCP connections or type U to select UDP connections The IAD displays a TCP or UPD prompt Type the timeout value and press Enter The IAD displays the NAT Configuration menu Continue with other NAT configuration tasks or press Escape to return 1 2 to the Main menu Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish configuring NAT NetEngine IAD User Guide NAT Configuration Configuring the NAT Port Range T 194 The size of the NAT port range defines the number of simultaneous connections permitted A small port range limits the number of connections Since the range that you assign must be outside the range of assigned ports do not set port ranges under 5 000 Under normal circumstances the port range default setting is adequate However if you interact with products including multiple player IP games or video conferencing you need to configure the port range setting To multiplex several connections to a single destination the IAD assigns all packets unique port numbers Each IP packet starts with a header that contain the source and destination addresses as well as two port numbers T
335. ures Description Discarded received packets due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffers etc Discarded received packets due to internal software errors Discarded received packets due to other reasons listed in the following Bad IP header format Illegal Source IP address in the IP header Illegal Destination IP address in the IP header Version field value in IP header is incorrect Value of Checksum field in IP header is incorrect Size of the IP header is less than 20 bytes Size of IP header is larger than packet size IP packet size is larger than internal packet buffer Value of Protocol Type field in IP header is unrecognized Value of TTL in the IP header reaches zero Value of Fragment field in the IP header is on No of reassembled fragmented packets No of discarded fragmented packets Total IP packet sent Total transmitted IP packet discarded due to lack of resources kernel memory packet buffer etc Total transmitted IP packet being discard due to internal errors Destination IP address could not be reached for outgoing packet Total fragmented sent Total outgoing IP packet being fragmented Total fragmentation failures for outgoing IP packets NetEngine IAD User Guide IAD Reports PIM Statistics Report 211 To display the PIM Statistics report type P on the Network Statistics menu The PIM Statistics report displays detailed information about PIM Protocol Indep
336. urrent value is displayed in parentheses To conveniently accept the current value just press Enter NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Basic Bridge Setup Tasks 130 Although the IAD is pre configured with bridging enabled you should perform these tasks for your network Enable bridging globally page 132 or by port page 133 Set the bridge aging timer page 134 Disable RIP poisoned reverse globally page 110 or by port page 110 Enable STP globally page 134 or by port page 134 Use this flowchart to plan your tasks based on your requirements Figure 6 1 Bridge Configuration Task Flowchart Enable bridging by port Enable bridging globally Enable sing spanning tree spanning by port Enable spanning tree globally priority NetEngine IAD User Guide Bridge Configuration Bridge Configur ation Menu T 131 Configuring the IAD as a bridge involves several tasks These are all displayed and accessed on the Bridge Configuration menu displayed by typing 3 on the Main menu Each task in this chapter is described beginning at the Bridge Configuration menu Figure 6 2 Bridge Configuration Menu kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkxkxk xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk kxx Bridge Configuration Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Enable Disable Bridging Globally Enable Disable Bridging by Port Configure Bridge Agin
337. vice or repair work Avoid using this product during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Each Verilink NetEngine IAD is warranted to be free from manufacturer s defects for the period of one year from the date of original purchase To contact Verilink Customer Service for product information repair or warranty service please visit our website at http www verilink com You may also call us Sales and Marketing 800 VERILINK 837 4546 Technical Support 800 285 2755 toll free 1 256 327 2255 international You may also write to Customer Service Verilink Corporation 127 Jetplex Circle Madison Alabama 35758 Some paragraphs display a symbol in the margin These paragraphs contain important notes or warnings or information that is specific to one or more IADs NOTE Information in this style of paragraph is special information you should be aware of as you proceed with the task at hand CAUTION Information in this style of paragraph indicates important personal safety information you should heed or voice operations that may be interrupted if you continue NetEngine IAD User Guide Preface Regulatory Notices xvi 6200 This paragraph alerts you to information that is specific to one or more IADs listed immediately to the left of the text Note that in some cases
338. x Clock Source E1 79 Utilities 33 Utilities 7000 36 Voice Configuration 140 Voice Gateway Selection 141 WAN Configuration 56 70 WAN Configuration ATM 57 WAN Configuration Frame Relay 57 WAN Datalink Protocol Configuration 56 58 61 menu interface exiting 20 menus Bridge Configuration 131 Configure CPE CO Mode 62 Configure GSHDSL Rate Mode 62 Configure xDSL Interface Type 60 MGCP NCS Embedded Client managing 151 MGCP NCS Management menu 151 MGCP NCS parameters 151 MGCP NGS Statistics 152 MIBs supported for SNMP 29 multicast configuring generally 182 enabling or disabling globally 182 IGMP Group displaying 186 PIM neighbor displaying 187 routing source adding 184 routing source displaying 185 routing source removing 185 routing table displaying 186 Multicast Configuration menu 182 multicast route source managing 183 Multicast Routing Source menu 183 N NAT alias entry configuring 195 alias entry deleting 200 alias table displaying 199 configuration generally 190 connection details displaying 197 connection table displaying 197 default settings 190 enabling 191 IP address deleting from table 199 local server entry deleting 200 local server table displaying 199 NAT local server configuring 192 port range configuring 194 statistics displaying 196 timeouts configuring 193 NAT Configuration menu 190 NAT Local Server Protocol Configuration menu 192 NetEngine IAD 6000 see 6000
339. y of all files Copy file Rename File Remove File by name Format File System drive Space left in File System NASxXDdAD To perform a task type the option and proceed to the appropriate section Displaying the IAD File Directory To display the files stored in flash memory type D on the File System menu The IAD displays the files and size Page down the list by pressing any key The IAD displays the amount of free memory at the end of the list Figure 3 8 IAD File System Directory MGCP_RG VG 173327 CUCOMCPE VG 16310 CALLCTRL VG 47774 TBCPE VG 20169 DTMF DSP 20046 G726 DSP 18076 CONFIG ST 4076 DEFAULT ST 426 REORDER PCM 838 RELEASE DAT 579 AAL2LES VG 23978 MGCP DSP 21822 BUSY PCM 960 CAS PCM 832 CW1 PCM 543 CW2 PCM 542 CW3 PCM 566 DIALTONE PCM 1378 RCVROFF PCM 1169 RINGBACK PCM 1177 LESELCP ST 768 MSGWAIT PCM 1199 RBK_G726 PCM 7089 RECALL PCM 1127 LES_ELCP VG 131556 MG_RG VG 172026 CUCOM CFG 100 USERPORT ST 160 LES_ELCP ST 128 SIP DSP 17520 RBK_ALAW PCM 703 SIP VG 23206 AUS 01 NPL 8819 EUR 0O1 NPL 8006 USA 01 NPL 8787 LES_ELCP DBG 690 EVENT LOG 988 AAL2LES CFG 58 Free disk space 263680 bytes NetEngine IAD User Guide Administration T 42 Copying Files To duplicate a file with a new name follow these steps 1 Type C on the File System menu The IAD prompts for the name of the source file old filename gt 2 Type the name of the existing file
340. y one and displays the prompt Complete entries for call agents 2 3 and 4 or press Enter to leave the agent unconfigured 3 The IAD displays the listening port prompt Enter the listening port of the Notified Entity Type the port number usually 2427 or 2727 that the call agent is listening on and press Enter 4 The IAD displays the available interfaces and a prompt MGCP Signaling parameters ATM VPI VCI 0 40 Connection 0 IP Address 0 0 0 0 NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 152 Available Interfaces 1 G2237 xDSL 2 10 100BaseT Ethernet 0 Abort Selection Type the option number to select the signaling interface for MGCP to use typically the WAN interface 5 The IAD displays the port table for this interface and prompts for a port Port VPI VCI Encapsulation Type PCR Service 1 O 40 RFC 1483 with LLC Encap 3641 UBR Total 3641 cps Maximum PCR this interface can support 3622 cps Select Port 1 8 Type the port to configure and press Enter 6 The IAD displays the bracketing prompt Enter option for using hostname with for Signaling Type Y to wrap the port in brackets for call agent API compatibility or N and press Enter 7 The IAD prompts for the outbound signaling packets TOS field value Enter the TOS byte value to use for Signalling packets 1 7 Type the field value and press Enter 8 The IAD prompts for the RTP transport packets TOS field value Ent
341. y options 97 CopperCom 282 CopperCom Call Control menu 155 CopperCom Call Control managing 155 CopperCom Configuration menu 156 CopperCom configuration 155 CopperMountain CMCP setting 101 CopperMountain fragmentation setting 98 Country Mode Selection menu 150 country mode setting 150 CPCS 2 Statistics report 222 CPE CO mode selecting 62 CPE CO mode setting for SDSL 65 CPE CO mode setting in 6500 63 CPEmode setting in AccessLan 66 Current Configuration report 203 customer service contacting xv D D4 Frame Mode 72 data interfaces supported 2 datalink protocol identifying 54 selecting for WAN 56 DC power adapter 4 Debug menu 43 declaration of conformity xviii default route adding or changing 113 removing 113 default routes generally 112 default values accepting 19 Derived Timing debugging 48 enabling and disabling 48 Derived Timing menu 48 DHCP Address Range Pool configuring 175 DHCP Assign ment Entry deleting 179 DHCP Client enabling or disabling 116 DHCP Client debug mode enabling and disabling 44 DHCP Client Entry configuring 175 DHCP Client Entry deleting DHCP Server DHCP Client Entry deleting 179 DHCP Entry details 179 DHCP Relay configuring 117 enabling or disabling 117 statistics displaying 118 DHCP Relay menu 117 DHCP Server addresses displaying 178 checking for additional 173 configuration generally 172 configuring parameters 174 DHCP Address Range Pool for 175 DHCP Assign ment Entry de
342. you can proceed through them sequentially You should review and update each of these options as necessary and reset the IAD when you finish WAN configuration To configure the G SHDSL interface type 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the G2237 xDSL Configuration menu 6504 This section is only for configuring the GSHDSL Annex A or 6504i Annex B WAN interface available on the 6504 6508 and 6508 6504i Figure 4 10 G2237 xDSL Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK KK G2237 xDSL Configuration KAKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK Current Interface Type is G SHDSL A Mode CPE Rate Mode FIXED Line Rate 88K Debug DISABLED Select xDSL Interface Type Select CPE CO Mode Enable Disable Adaptive Rate Mode Select Line Rate Enable Disable G2237 xDSL Debug Messages J BWNEF NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 62 Selecting CPE or CO Mode 1 Type 2 to display the Configure CPE CO Mode menu Figure 4 11 Configure CPE CO Mode Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKKKKKKKK KK KKK Configure CPE CO Mode KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK KKK Current Mode CPE 1 CPE Zi CO Type 1 to select CPE or type 2 to select CO mode 2 The IAD sets the mode and displays the menu 3 Press Escape to return to the SDSL Configuration Menu Enabling and Disabling Adaptive Rat
343. ype 2 Configure Physical Interface on the WAN Configuration menu to display the ADSL Configuration menu 6100 4 This section is only for configuring the ADSL WAN interface 6108 on the 6100 4 6108 and 6104i 6104i Figure 4 19 G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK G7070 ADSL ATU R Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK 1 Set ADSL Standard D Enable Disable ADSL Debug Messages 5 Type 1 to select Set ADSL Standard The IAD displays the ADSL Standard menu Figure 4 20 ADSL Standard to use for Startup Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK ADSL Standard to use for Startup KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK KK KKK Current ADSL Standard Multi Mode T1 413 G LITE G DMT Alcatel 1 4 Multi Mode ADI Alcatel o U e w o H Type the option corresponding to the ATM standard 6 The IAD sets the standard you select and displays the menu 7 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish WAN configuration Using the Debug Menu NOTE Option D ADSL Debug Messages is reserved for Verilink network engineers NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 70 Setting the To determine the WAN interface setting or to switch the WAN interface for use ina T1 North American or E1 environment type 5 Configure WAN To to on the Main menu to display the WAN Configuration menu for T1 E or 6200 8 This section
344. ys the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu 4 You must reset the IAD page 15 before enabling Idle CAS refresh Enabling and Disabling Idle CAS Refreshing 1 Type I to enable or disable idle CAS refreshing You can only enable idle CAS refresh when CAS refresh is enabled immediately preceding 2 Type E to enable Idle CAS refresh or D to disable Idle CAS refresh 3 The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu and indicates in the message section that the change in the Idle CAS refresh will take place when the IAD is reset NetEngine IAD User Guide Voice Path Configuration 163 4 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Changing the Maximum CPS SDU Size 1 Type s to switch the maximum CPS payload size between 45 and 64 octets 2 The IAD displays the AAL2 LES Manual Configuration menu Included in the settings is a payload size message indicating 45 or 64 octets 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Setting the Combined Use Timer 1 Type T to modify the combined use timer in 5 ms increments The IAD displays this prompt New Combined Use timer period in 5ms increment Type the new timer period and press Enter 2 The IAD updates the setting and displays the menu 3 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish voice path configuration Enabling and Disabling User State Control 1 Type U to enable or disable user state control by togglin
345. ys the Configure S Bits menu and current settings NetEngine IAD User Guide WAN Configuration 78 Figure 4 33 Configure S Bits Menu KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKKKKKK KKK Configure S Bits Menu KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Current S Bit Configuration Sa4 Bit Cleared Sa5 Bit Cleared Sa6 Bit Cleared Sa7 Bit Cleared Sa8 Bit Cleared 2 Toggle Sa4 Bi 3 Toggle Sa5 Bit 4 Toggle Sao Bit 5 Toggle Sa7 Bit 6 Toggle Sa8 Bit 3 To toggle a given bit type the corresponding option number 4 The IAD saves the configuration and displays the menu 5 Continue setting S bits When you ve finished press Escape to return to the E1 Configuration menu and continue configuration tasks 6 Reset the IAD page 15 when you finish E1 configuration Configuring the Transmit and Receive Channels Type 5 to select Configure Transmit Channels or type 6 to select Configure Receive Channels The IAD displays a message indicating the number of channels enabled and displays the Channel Configuration menu Figure 4 34 Channel Configuration Menu Tx Channels Enabled No Channels Enabled KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Channel Configuration Menu KKEKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KK KKK 1 Enable All Channels 2 Disable All Channels 3 Select Individual Channels 4 Select Channel Range Esc To Return To Previou

Polycom KIRK Wireless Server 6000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents